Roland BK-7m User Guide

Page 1
Owner’s Manual
r
Page 2
WARNING
– To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this device to rain or moisture.
This product complies with the requirements of European Directive EMC 2004/108/EC.
For EU countries
For EU Countries
For the USA
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. — Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. — Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. — Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment. This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
For C.A. US (Proposition 65
WARNING
This product contains chemicals known to cause cancer, birth defects and other reproductive harm, including lead.
For the UK
For the U.K.
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
BLUE: BROWN:
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug.
NEUTRAL LIVE
For the USA
For the USA
)
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
BK-7m Backing Module
Page 3
r
Copyright © 2011 ROLAND EUROPE. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of Roland Europe S.p.a.
Roland is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Roland Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Owner’s Manual
Thank you and congratulations on your choice of the Roland BK-7m Backing Module. To ensure that you obtain the maximum enjoyment and take full advantage of the BK-7m’s functionality, please read
this owner’s manual carefully.
ENGLISH ENGLISH
About this manual
You should first read the chapter “Before you start using the BK-7m” on p. 15. It explains how to connect the AC adap­tor and turn on the power. This Owner’s Manual explains everything, from the BK-7m’s basic operations to more advanced functions.
Conventions in this manual
In order to explain the operations as clearly as possible, this manual uses the following conventions:
•Text enclosed in square brackets [ ] indicates the name of a button or knob. Example: the [USER PROGRAM] button.
• Paragraphs that begin with “NOTE” are cautionary statements that you must read.
• Paragraphs that begin with “MEMO” contain useful information that may come in handy.
•The numbers of pages that you can turn to for additional or related information are given like this: (p. **).
The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display. Note, however, that your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system (e.g., include newer sounds), so what you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual.
Before using this instrument, carefully read “Using the unit safely” on p. 4 and “Important notes” on p. 6. Those sections provide information concerning the proper operation of the BK-7m. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, the manual should be read in its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.
ENGLISH ENGLISH
Page 4
Backing Module
Using the unit safely
BK-7m
Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe injury should the unit be used improperly.
Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly.
* Material damage refers to damage or
other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings, as well to domestic animals or pets.
• Do not open (or modify in any way) the unit or its AC adaptor.
.................................................................................................
• Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts within it (except when this manual provides specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer all servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland dis­tributor, as listed on the “Information” page.
.................................................................................................
• Never install the unit in any of the following locations.
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct sunlight
in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or are
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors); or are
• Exposed to steam or smoke; or are
• Subject to salt exposure; or are
• Humid; or are
• Exposed to rain; or are
• Dusty or sandy; or are
• Subject to high levels of vibration and shakiness.
.................................................................................................
•Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
.................................................................................................
• Be sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied with the unit. Also, make sure the line voltage at the installation matches the input voltage specified on the AC adaptor's body. Other AC adaptors may use a different polarity, or be designed for a different voltage, so their use could result in damage, malfunction, or electric shock.
.................................................................................................
• Use only the supplied power-supply cord. Also, the sup­plied power cord must not be used with any other device.
.................................................................................................
• Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord, nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so can damage the cord, producing severed elements and short circuits. Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards!
.................................................................................................
r
The symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the unit must never be disassembled.
The symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out. The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power­cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
• This unit, in combination with an amplifier and head­phones or speakers, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level, or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should immediately stop using the unit, and consult an audiologist.
................................................................................................
• Never allow foreign objects (e.g., flammable material, coins, pins) or liquids (e.g., water or juice) to enter this unit. Doing so may cause short circuits, faulty operation, or other malfunctions.
................................................................................................
•Immediately turn the power off, remove the AC adaptor from the outlet, and request servicing by your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the “Information” page when:
• The AC adaptor, the power-supply cord, or the plug has been
damaged; or
• If smoke or unusual odor occurs
• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been spilled onto the unit;
or
• The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise has become
wet); or
• The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a
marked change in performance.
................................................................................................
•In households with small children, an adult should pro­vide supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit.
................................................................................................
• Protect the unit from strong impact. (Do not drop it!)
................................................................................................
4
Page 5
• Do not force the unit's power-supply cord to share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices. Be especially careful when using extension cords—the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord's outlet must never exceed the power rating (watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through.
.................................................................................................
• Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the “Informa­tion” page.
.................................................................................................
• The unit and the AC adaptor should be located so their location or position does not interfere with their proper ventilation.
.................................................................................................
•Always grasp only the plug on the AC adaptor cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this unit.
Backing Module BK-7m
Using the unit safely
r
.................................................................................................
• At regular intervals, you should unplug the AC adaptor and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all dust and other accumulations away from its prongs. Also, discon­nect the power plug from the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time. Any accumulation of dust between the power plug and the power outlet can result in poor insulation and lead to fire.
.................................................................................................
• Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entan­gled. Also, all cords and cables should be placed so they are out of the reach of children.
.................................................................................................
• Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on the unit.
.................................................................................................
• Never handle the AC adaptor or its plugs with wet hands when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this unit.
.................................................................................................
• Before moving the unit, disconnect the AC adaptor and all cords coming from external devices.
.................................................................................................
• Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet (see p. 20).
.................................................................................................
•Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area, disconnect the AC adaptor from the outlet.
.................................................................................................
• Keep the included screw in a safe place out of children’s reach, so there is no chance of it being swallowed acci­dentally.
.................................................................................................
5
Page 6
Backing Module

Important notes

BK-7m
1. Important notes
In addition to the items listed under “Using the unit safely” on p. 4, please read and observe the following:
Power supply
• Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is being used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by an inverter (such as a refrigerator, washing machine, microwave oven, or air conditioner), or that contains a motor. Depending on the way in which the electrical appliance is used, power supply noise may cause this unit to malfunction or may produce audible noise. If it is not practical to use a separate electrical outlet, connect a power supply noise filter between this unit and the electrical outlet.
• The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after long hours of consecutive use. This is normal, and is not a cause for concern.
• Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/or damage to speakers or other devices.
Placement
• Using the BK-7m near power amplifiers (or other equipment con­taining large power transformers) may induce hum. To alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this instrument or move it further away from the source of interference.
• This device may interfere with radio and television reception. Do not use it in the vicinity of such receivers.
• Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices, such as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of this unit. Such noise could occur when receiving or initiating a call, or while conversing. Should you experience such problems, you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit, or switch them off.
• Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed vehicle, or otherwise sub­ject it to temperature extremes. Excessive heat can deform or dis­color the unit.
•When moved from one location to another where the temperature and/or humidity is very different, water droplets (condensation) may form inside the BK-7m. Damage or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition. Therefore, before using the unit, you must allow it to stand for several hours, until the condensation has completely evaporated.
• Depending on the material and temperature of the surface on which you place the unit, its rubber feet may discolor or mar the surface. You can place a piece of felt or cloth under the rubber feet to pre­vent this from happening. If you do so, please make sure that the unit will not slip or move accidentally.
• Avoid the use of insecticides, perfumes, alcohol, nail polish, spray cans, etc., near the unit. Swiftly wipe away any liquid that spills on the unit using a dry, soft cloth.
Maintenance
• For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water. To remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a mild, nonabrasive detergent. Afterwards, be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry cloth.
• Never use benzene, thinner, alcohol or solvents of any kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or deformation.
Additional precautions
• Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored on a USB memory once it has been lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data.
• Use a reasonable amount of care when using the BK-7m’s buttons, other controls and jacks/connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.
• Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
•When connecting/disconnecting cables, grasp the connector itself—never pull on the cable. This way you will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cable’s internal elements.
• To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the BK-7m’s vol­ume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about those around you (espe­cially late at night).
•When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box (including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise, you will need to use equivalent packaging materials.
• Use only the specified expression pedal (Roland EV-series, sold separately) or pedal switch (Roland DP-series, BOSS FS-5U). By connecting any other expression pedal or footswitch, you risk causing malfunction and/or damage the unit.
• Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit. The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low, or impossible to hear. For information on cable specifications, contact the man­ufacturer of the cable.
Storage devices that can be connected to the BK-7m’s USB MEMORY port
• The BK-7m allows you to connect commercially available USB Flash memory. You can purchase such devices at a computer store, a digital camera dealer, etc.
• Though external hard disks with a capacity in excess of 2TB can be used, please bear in mind that the BK-7m can manage a maximum of 2TB. (FAT-32 formatted storage devices can be used right away.)
• Use USB memory sold by Roland (M-UF-series). We cannot guar­antee operation if any other USB memory is used.
Before using external USB storage devices
•When connecting a USB memory, firmly insert it all the way into the EXTERNAL MEMORY port.
• Do not touch the pins of the EXTERNAL MEMORY port or allow them to become dirty.
•While using an external USB memory, please observe the following points when handling it:
• To prevent damage from static electrical charges, discharge any
static electricity that might be present in your body before han­dling a USB memory.
• Do not touch the terminals with your fingers or any metal
object.
• Do not bend or drop a USB memory, or subject it to strong
impact.
• Do not leave a USB memory in direct sunlight or in locations
such as a closed-up automobile.
• Do not allow a USB memory to become wet.
• Do not disassemble or modify your external USB memory.
•When connecting a USB memory, position it horizontally with the BK-7m’s USB MEMORY port and insert it without using excessive force. The USB MEMORY port may be damaged if you use excessive force when inserting a USB memory.
• Do not insert anything other than a USB memory (e.g., wire, coins, other types of device) into the USB MEMORY port. Doing so will damage the BK-7m’s USB MEMORY port.
r
6
Page 7
• Do not apply excessive force to the connected USB memory or the
• GS ( ) is a registered trademark of Roland Corporation.
• Cakewalk is a registered trademark, and the SONAR and Cakewalk logos are trademarks of Cakewalk, Inc.
• Lexicon Pantheon is a trademark of Lexicon Pro, a Harman International Company.
•Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• The screen shots in this document are used in compliance with the guidelines of the Microsoft Corporation.
• Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
•Mac OS is a trademark of Apple Inc.
•All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
•MPEG Layer-3 audio compression technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS Corporation and THOMSON Multimedia Corporation.
• Copyright © 2003 by Bitstream, Inc. All rights reserved. Bitstream Vera is a trademark of Bitstream, Inc.
• Copyright © 2011 BOSS CORPORATION. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permis­sion of BOSS CORPORATION.
• MMP (Moore Microprocessor Portfolio) refers to a patent portfolio concerned with microprocessor architecture, which was developed by Technol­ogy Properties Limited (TPL). Roland has licensed this technology from the TPL group.
BK-7m’s USB MEMORY port.
• Never connect your USB memory to the BK-7m via a USB hub.
Liability and copyright
• Recording, duplication, distribution, sale, lease, performance, or broadcast of copyrighted material (musical works, visual works, broadcasts, live performances, etc.) belonging to a third party in part or in whole without the permission of the copyright owner is forbidden by law.
• Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copy­right held by a third party. Roland assumes no responsibility what­soever with regard to any infringements of third-party copyrights arising through your use of this unit.
About audio files
• Audio files in the following formats can be played back:
•WAV format
• 16-bit linear
• Sampling rate of 44.1kHz
• Stereo/mono
•mp3 files:
•MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3
• Sampling frequency: 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48kHz
•Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/
320kbps, VBR (variable bit rate)
Backing Module BK-7m
r
Important notes
Supported Standard MIDI Files
• Format 0/1
7
Page 8
Backing Module

Features

BK-7m
2. Features
The BK-7m is a professional backing module designed to provide everything the entertaining artist and serious amateur musician needs on the stage, in the studio, or at home.
High-quality sounds
The best sounds generated by a top-level sound gen­erator with 128-voice polyphony.
The BK-7m also contains two sounds that use SuperNATURAL technology to realistically express the sounds and simulate performance techniques of these acoustic instruments.
Technology
SuperNATURAL is Roland’s proprietary sound-generation technology that realistically reproduces the tonal changes and performance techniques distinctive of an acoustic instrument, allowing you to perform music that is natural and richly expressive.
High-quality Music Styles
Your BK-7m comes loaded with over 400 impressive accompaniment covering every musical genre. Each Style comprises 4 Intros, 4 Main variations, 4 Endings, 3 “Up” and 3 “Down” Fill-Ins.
Four different settings for each Music Style (One Touch)
Four different settings that assign the most suitable tones, effects and other parameters to the real-time parts depending on the Music Style you select.
USB-based Standard MIDI Files and Style player
The BK-7m plays Standard MIDI Files and Music Styles directly from a connected USB memory.
16 Song parts
The BK-7m also provides 16 Song parts, which are used for Standard MIDI File playback but can also be controlled via MIDI (a computer connected to the MIDI IN socket or the COMPUTER USB port). This allows you to use the BK-7m as a 16-part multitim­bral MIDI tone generator.
Cover function for Standard MIDI files and Music Styles
Simply by selecting one of 30 presets, you can cause a Viennese waltz to be played back by a heavy metal band, etc. Even though the arrangement (rhythm, riffs) does not change, the song’s character can be changed beyond recognition.
Song and Style Makeup Tools for Standard MIDI Files and Music Styles
These tools allow you to modify songs in no time without knowing the MIDI commands normally used to perform such changes.
Performance List function
This function allows you to save nearly all of the BK-7m’s settings for each song and/or Music Style you will be using during your performances. The list that contains these settings can be saved to a USB memory and loaded from there whenever the need arises.
USB-based audio player and audio recorder
The BK-7m contains an audio player function that allows you to play back mp3 and WAV files directly from a connected USB memory.
The BK-7m also allows you to record your perfor­mances. The resulting WAV files (audio) can be played back on the BK-7m itself.
Wizard connection
Simply following the instructions of the BK-7m’s Wizard connection will allow you to connect the BK-7m to an external MIDI controller (digital piano, MIDI master keyboard, digital accordion, etc.) and to start playing right away.
Four real-time parts
The BK-7m comes with four MIDI parts (Upper 1, Upper 2, Lower, Manual Bass) that can be played in real time—either together or in isolation.
16 NTA parts (Note-to-Arranger)
The BK-7m provides up to 16 MIDI parts dedicated to Arranger control via MIDI (“Note-to-Arranger”).
Multi-effects for Music Styles or Standard MIDI files and real-time parts
With a view to obtaining the highest possible sound quality, the BK-7m contains three dedicated multi­effects processors (MFX A, B, and C) for the Standard MIDI Files and Music Styles you play back. In addition, there is one MFX processor for the real-tim parts (Upper 1, Upper 2, Lower, Manual Bass).
Composite Video Out
The BK-7m’s VIDEO OUTPUT socket can be connected to an external screen, allowing your audience or fel­low musicians to follow the lyrics and chord symbols of the songs you perform.
…and so much more!
r
8
Page 9

Contents

Backing Module BK-7m
r
1. Important notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2. Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3. Panel description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Front panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4. Shortcut list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5. Before you start using the BK-7m. . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Connecting the AC adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Connecting the BK-7m to an amplifier, mixer, etc. . 15
Connecting a MIDI device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting the BK-7m to your computer . . . . . . . . . 17
If the computer doesn’t ‘see’ the BK-7m . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting a television set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting an optional footswitch, pedal or pedal
unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Attaching the BK-7m to a stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Listening through headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Turning the power on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Turning the power on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Turning the power off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Demo of the BK-7m. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
6. Basic operation of the BK-7m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
About the display and cursor operation. . . . . . . . . . . 21
Main page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Moving the cursor and setting parameter values . . . . . .21
Moving between windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
7. Wizard Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Generic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Details about the ‘Wizard Connection’ categories . . 23
‘DIGITAL PIANO’ category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
‘ACCORDION’ category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
‘MASTER KEYBOARD’ category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
‘GUITAR’ category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
‘DIGITAL ORGAN’ category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
‘COMPUTER/SEQUENCER’ category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
8. Playing the BK-7m’s real-time parts . . . . . . . . . . .27
Switching real-time parts on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Selecting Tones for the real-time parts . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Selecting Tones using the [PART] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Using the [UP1], [UP2], [LWR] and [MBS] buttons to
select Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Selecting a Tone on the main page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Selecting SuperNATURAL sounds (UP1 part) . . . . . . . . . .29
9. Music Style functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Volume balance between the backing and the real-
time parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
About the Music Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using Music Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Selecting Music Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Playing back Music Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Using the ‘One Touch’ function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
10. Using the BK-7m as a USB player . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Getting ready to use the BK-7m as a USB player. . . 35
File types the BK-7m can read and play back . . . . . . . . . 35
Selecting a song or Music Style on a USB memory. 35 Playing back a song or Music Style from a USB
memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
11. Other important functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Changing the key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Changing the octave. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Using ‘Track Mute’ and ‘Center Cancel’ . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Selecting the track(s) to mute for Music Styles or SMF
songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Using Split mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Metronome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
12. Performance Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Performance/Music Assistant Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Loading a Performance/Music Assistant List. . . . . . . 41
Recalling a Performance/Music Assistant memory . 42
Quickly locating Performance memories. . . . . . . . . . 42
Saving your settings as a Performance . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Other Performance List functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
If you select ‘Edit’. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
If you select ‘Rename’. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
If you select ‘Delete’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
If you select ‘Make New’. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
13. Recording your performance as audio data . . . . . 46
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Listening to your recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Saving your recording as an audio file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
14. Cover functions for Music Styles and SMF songs 48
Using Music Style or SMF Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Saving your modified Music Style or SMF song . . . . 49
15. Menu options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
General procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
‘Performance Edit’ parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
‘Tone Part View’ parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
‘Tone Part Effects’ parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
‘Style Parts’ parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
‘Arranger Setting’ parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
‘Melody Intelligent’ parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Save As Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
‘Global’ parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Save Global. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
MIDI parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Loading a MIDI Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Edit Style Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Edit Song Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Edit Tone Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Edit System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
NTA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Save MIDI Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
9
Page 10
Backing Module BK-7m
Mastering Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
SMF/Style Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
SMF/Style Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Tone/Part Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Tone/Part Equalizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Makeup Tools (Style and SMF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Using the Makeup Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Common. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Freeze Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Saving your new Music Style or song (SMF) version . . .81
V-LINK function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Factory Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Formatting a USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
16. Using the BK-7m with SONAR LE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Installing Sonar LE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
BK-7m instrument definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
17. Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
18. ‘Wizard Connection’ settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
19. Music Style list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Style division program change numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Recalling a Performance memory from the loaded
Performance List via MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
20. Tone List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
21. Drum Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
22. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
23. MIDI Implementation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
24. MFX types and parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
r
10
Page 11
3. Panel description

Front panel

Backing Module BK-7m

Panel description

r
A
D
B
J
K
C
RST
UV WX Y Za b
A
VOLUME knob
Use this knob to set the BK-7m’s global output vol­ume (all signals transmitted to the OUTPUT sockets). The setting of this knob also determines the volume in the headphones you may connect.
B
AUDIO IN knob
This knob allows you to set the input level of the sig­nals received via the AUDIO INPUT jacks.
C
BALANCE knob
This knob allows you to set the balance between the Music Styles and Songs (BACKING) and the real time parts (PART).
D
Display
This display shows information related to your opera­tion.
E
MENU button
This button allows you to open the BK-7m’s menu page where you can view and select all available functions. Press it together with the [EXIT] button to listen to the BK-7m’s demo songs.
F
EXIT button
This button is used to return to a higher menu level. Press and hold it to return to the BK-7m’s main dis­play page.
E
G
MN OP Q
L
G
KEY button
This button calls up the BK-7m’s transposition func­tion. Its settings can be applied to Music Styles, Songs and the four real-time parts (UP1, UP2, LWR, MBS).
If the button’s indicator doesn’t light, the Music Styles, Songs and the four real-time parts use their normal pitch.
H
TRACK MUTE/CENTER CANCEL button
This button lets you mute the melody part of the selected Standard MIDI File, or attenuate the vocal part at the center of an audio file (WAV or mp3), allowing you to sing or play that part yourself.
Pressing and holding this button calls up a display page where you can select the Standard MIDI File part(s) that you don’t want to hear.
I
CURSOR/VALUE dial
This dial can be used to move the cursor in the dis­play, to select parameters and to set values. By press­ing it, you can select items in the display (SELECT).
J
ONE TOUCH button
After pressing this button, you can use the [1], [2], [3] and [4] buttons to select the desired One Touch memory.
F
H
I
11
Page 12
Backing Module BK-7m
Panel description
K
1/2/3/4 & MBS/LWR/UP2/UP1 buttons
These buttons are used to either select a One Touch memory (if [ONE TOUCH] lights) or to switch the real­time parts (Upper1, Upper2, Lower, Manual Bass) on and off (if [PART] lights).
While the [PART] button lights, pressing and holding one of these four buttons calls up a display page where you can select another sound (“Tone”) for the real-time part in question.
L
PART button
After pressing this button, you can use the [1/UP1], [2/UP2], [3/LWR] and [4/MBS] buttons to switch the corresponding real-time parts on and off (page 27).
M
SPLIT button
This button is used to activate Split mode. While its indicator lights, notes played to the left of the C4 on an external keyboard trigger the LWR, MBS and NTA parts, if they are on. Notes to the right of the split point, on the other hand, trigger the UP1 and UP2 parts. See “Using Split mode” on p. 39.
N
OCTAVE button
This button allows you to transpose the real-time parts in octave steps (page 37).
O
PERFORMANCE LIST button
This button calls up the Performance List (page 41).
P
PERFORMANCE WRITE button
The main function of the button is to save Perfor­mance settings. Depending on the selected display page, it can also be used to save Music Styles, and songs.
Q
USB MEMORY button
Press this button to call up a list of the files stored on the USB memory connected to the BK-7m‘s USB MEMORY port.
R
RHYTHM FAMILY buttons
These buttons are used to select the family of the next Music Style you want to use. Pressing one of these buttons calls up a list of all Music Styles con­tained in the selected family.
S
TEMPO buttons
These buttons can be used to decrease or increase the tempo of the currently selected Music Style or song. Pressing them together recalls the Music Style’s or song’s stored tempo value.
NOTE
You can also use the [TAP TEMPO] button W to set the desired tempo.
T
SYNC START button
This buttons is used to activate or switch off the BK-7m’s Sync Start function. If it is on, Music Style playback can be started by simply playing a note or chord on the external keyboard. See also page 31.
While a song file is selected, this button stops play­back.
U
AUDIO REC button
This button is used to start audio recording of your performance. This function records everything the BK-7m transmits to its OUTPUT sockets (audio signals you play back and audio versions of the MIDI parts you control). See page 46.
V
BASS INV button
This button is used to switch the Bass Inversion func­tion on and off (page 32).
W
TAP TEMPO button
Pressing this button several times allows you to change the current Music Style’s or song’s tempo to the value calculated from the speed at which the button is pressed.
Pressing and holding this button calls up the BK-7m’s “Metronome” page.
X
AUTO FILL IN button
This button is used to activate the Auto Fill-In func­tion, which causes a transition to be played before selecting the new Music Style Variation (which is selected with the VARIATION buttons).
Y
VARIATION 1/2/3/4 buttons
These buttons are used to select a Music Style “Varia­tion”, i.e. a simpler or more complex arrangement of the selected Music Style.
Z
INTRO button
When you activate this button, Music Style playback starts with a musical introduction whose complexity depends on which VARIATION button currently lights (there are four different introductions per Music Style).
After selecting a song file, this button allows you to rewind.
NOTE
You can also press this button during Music Style playback.
a
ENDING button
When you activate this button, Music Style stops with a musical ending whose complexity depends on which VARIATION button currently lights (there are four different ending phrases per Music Style).
After selecting a song file, this button allows you to fast-forward.
b
START/STOP button
This button allows you to start and stop Music Style playback. If you select a song, it starts and tempo­rarily stops (pause) song playback.
r
12
Page 13

Rear panel

Backing Module BK-7m
r
Rear panel
AB
CD E
A
USB COMPUTER port
Use a USB cable to connect the BK-7m to your com­puter via this connector (page 17).
B
USB MEMORY port
Connect a optional USB memory here.
Note: Roland does not recommend using USB hubs, irre­spective of whether they are active or passive. Please con­nect only one USB memory to this port.
NOTE
Use USB memory sold by Roland. We cannot guarantee operation if any another USB memory is used.
C
AUDIO INPUT R & L/MONO sockets
These sockets allow you to connect the audio outputs of an external signal source (CD/mp3 player, synthe­sizer, etc.).
(The [AUDIO IN] knob on the front panel allows you to set the input level of the signals received via these sockets.)
D
AUDIO OUTPUT R & L/MONO sockets
These sockets transmit all audio signals the BK-7m generates as well as the signals you input to the BK-7m.
FG H
G
PEDAL SWITCH/EXPRESSION socket
Connect a separately available pedal switch (Roland DP-series), a separately available foot switch (BOSS FS-5U) or a separately available expression pedal (Roland EV-5) to this jack (page 17).
H
PEDAL FC-7 socket
This is where you connect an optional FC-7 pedal unit. The functions of this unit are programmable on the BK-7m. See “Pedal Controller FC-7” on p. 65.
I
MIDI IN & OUT sockets
You can connect MIDI devices to these sockets (page 16).
J
POWER switch
Turns the power on/off (page 19).
K
DC IN socket
Connect the supplied AC adapter PSB-1U here (page 15).
K
J
I
NOTE
If you can/want to use only one channel on your external amplifier, connect the L/MONO socket to its input. For opti­mum sound quality, we recommend working in stereo, though.
E
PHONES socket
This is where you can connect a pair of optional headphones (Roland RH-series).
F
VIDEO OUTPUT socket
Connect this socket to the appropriate input of your TV or external display.
NOTE
The signal format (PAL or NTSC) and aspect ratio selectable (page 63).
13
Page 14
Backing Module BK-7m

Shortcut list

4. Shortcut list
Pressing and holding the following buttons allows you to directly jump to a related parameter page, which is faster than selecting the page in question via the BK-7m’s menu
Press and hold Function
Transposition key default (“0”)
Open the “Style Track Mute” or “Song Track Mute” page
Open the “Split” page
Open the “Metronome” page
r
14
Page 15
5. Before you start using the BK-7m
Backing Module BK-7m
Before you start using the BK-7m
r

Connecting the AC adaptor

1.
Turn the [VOLUME] knob all the way to the left to minimize the volume.
2.
Connect the included power cord to the AC adapter.
The indicator will light once you plug the AC adaptor into a wall outlet.
AC adapter Power cord
to an AC outlet
Indicator
Place the AC adapter so the side with the indicator (see illustration) faces upwards and the side with tex­tual information faces downwards.
NOTE
Depending on your region, the included power cord may differ from the one shown above.
3.
Connect the AC adaptor to the BK-7m’s DC IN jack.
BK-7m’s rear panel
Connecting the BK-7m to an amplifier, mixer, etc.
You can also connect the BK-7m’s OUTPUT sockets to the audio inputs of an external instrument (digital piano, etc.), in which case you don’t need an external amplifier.
NOTE
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections.
1.
Switch off all devices.
2.
Connect the BK-7m’s OUTPUT jacks to the inputs of your external device. Connect the outputs of an external signal source to the BK-7m’s INPUT sockets.
Connecting the BK-7m to an amplifier
4.
Plug the power cord into a power outlet.
Note: Be sure to use only the AC adapter supplied with the
unit (PSB-1U). Also, make sure the line voltage at the installation matches the input voltage specified on the AC adapter’s body. Other AC adapters may use a different polarity, or be designed for a different voltage, so their use could result in damage, malfunction, or electric shock.
NOTE
If you won’t be using the BK-7m for an extended period of time, disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet.
INPUT L + R
OUTPUT R + L/MONO
Connecting the BK-7m to the audio inputs of another instrument
INPUT
L + R
OUTPUT R + L/MONO
For the connection to an amplifier, please choose unbalanced (mono) cables with 1/4” plugs at one end (for the BK-7m). The connectors at the other end need to match the input sockets of the device to which you are connecting the BK-7m.
15
Page 16
Backing Module BK-7m
Before you start using the BK-7m
NOTE
When connection cables with resistors are used, the vol­ume level of equipment connected to the audio inputs may be low. If this happens, use connection cables that do not contain resistors.

Connecting a MIDI device

To control the BK-7m using your digital piano, MIDI accordion, etc., you need to connect it as follows:
1.
Turn the [VOLUME] knob all the way to the left to minimize the volume.
2.
Use two MIDI cables (commercially avail­able) to connect the BK-7m’s MIDI IN socket to the MIDI OUT socket of the external MIDI instrument.
To transmit MIDI data to an external device (sequencer, computer, sound module, etc.), connect the BK-7m’s MIDI OUT socket to the MIDI IN socket of that device.
If you wish to use the BK-7m with a digital piano, connect its MIDI OUT socket to the digital piano’s MIDI IN socket, and its MIDI IN socket to the digital piano’s MIDI OUT socket.
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI-compatible digital piano, etc.
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI master keyboard, etc.
NOTE
Certain instruments, like an FR-3x V-Accordion, only have one MIDI socket whose function (IN or OUT) needs to be set with one of its MIDI parameters. To control the BK-7m from such an instrument, you need to set the latter to transmit MIDI messages (OUT).
NOTE
See “Wizard Connection” on p. 22 for how to ensure that the BK-7m receives (the correct) MIDI messages.
r
16
Page 17
Backing Module BK-7m
Connecting the BK-7m to your computer
r
Connecting the BK-7m to your computer
If you use a USB cable (commercially available) to con­nect the COMPUTER port located on the BK-7m’s rear panel to the USB port of your computer, you’ll be able to do the following things.
•Use the BK-7m as a sound module.
• By transferring MIDI data between the BK-7m and your sequencer software, you’ll be able to enjoy a wide range of possibilities for music production and editing.
1.
Use a standard USB cable (A‰B-type con­nectors, commercially available) to connect the BK-7m to your computer as shown below.
USB cable
Computer
USB port
2.
Refer to the Roland website for system requirements. Roland website: http://www.roland.com/
As an alternative, you can connect the BK-7m’s MIDI OUT and MIDI IN sockets to a MIDI interface and con­nect the latter to your computer.

Connecting a television set

Video cable
(Commercially available)
(Rear panel)
VIDEO OUTPUT
NOTE
Before you make connections to other devices, you must turn down the volume of all devices and turn off their power to prevent malfunctions or damage to your speak­ers.
1.
Switch off the BK-7m and the television set you’ll be connecting.
2.
Connect the BK-7m to your television set.
Use a video cable (commercially available) to connect the BK-7m’s VIDEO OUTPUT jack to the television set.
3.
Switch on the BK-7m (see p. 19).
4.
Switch on your television set.
5.
(As necessary) Specify the television output format (see p. 63).
6.
Specify the aspect ratio for your television set.
The aspect ratio is the proportional relationship between the width and height of the screen. See page 63.
Television
If the computer doesn’t ‘see’ the BK-7m
Normally, you don’t need to install a driver in order to connect the BK-7m to your computer. However, if some problem occurs, or if the performance is poor, using the Roland original driver may solve the problem.
For details on downloading and installing the Roland original driver, refer to the Roland website: http://www.roland.com/
Specify the USB driver you want to use, and then install the driver. For details, refer to “USB Driver” on p. 64.
Caution
•To avoid the risk of malfunction and/or damage to external speakers, always turn the volume all the way down and switch off the power on all devices before you make any connections.
• Only MIDI data can be transmitted and received via USB. Audio data for a song recorded on the BK-7m cannot be transmitted or received.
• Switch on the power to the BK-7m before you start up the MIDI application on your computer. Never turn the BK-7m’s power on/off while your MIDI application is running.

Connecting an optional footswitch, pedal or pedal unit

Footswitch or expression pedal
The BK-7m provides a PEDAL SWITCH/EXPRESSION jack to which you can connect an optional foot­switch (Roland DP-series or BOSS FS-5U) or an expression pedal (Roland EV-series).
Optional footswitch (Roland DP-series, BOSS FS-5U) —or— Optional expression pedal (Roland EV-series)
If you connect a footswitch, you can select the func­tion it should perform (page 64). By default, the foot­switch will control the “Hold” function.
17
Page 18
Backing Module BK-7m
Before you start using the BK-7m
NOTE
Use only the specified expression pedal (Roland EV-series, sold separately) or pedal switch (Roland DP-series, BOSS FS-5U). By connecting any other expression pedal or foot­switch, you risk causing malfunction and/or damage the unit.
FC-7 pedal unit
You can also connect an optional FC-7 MIDI Foot Controller to the PEDAL FC-7 socket.
Attaching the BK-7m to a stand
By using the separately sold PDS-10, you can attach the BK-7m to a stand as shown in the illustration below.
NOTE
Use only the screws (M5x12) supplied with the BK-7m to attach the unit to the Roland PDS-10 stand (sold separately). Other screws or other usages of the screw holes may damage the BK-7m.
NOTE
Never insert the screws supplied with the BK-7m without attaching the BK-7m to the PDS-10 stand.
NOTE
When using the PDS-10, extend the legs to their maximum spread. Do not allow the overall height including the BK-7m to exceed 1 meter.
PSD-10 stand plate
BK-7m bottom plate
At first, the switches of this pedal board are assigned Music Style control functions. You can, however, assign other functions to these switches (page 65).
Note: Be sure to use the screws supplied with the BK-7m.
The assembly (BK-7m and PDS-10) should look as shown to the right.
• See the PDS-10’s owner’s manual for details about how to attach the BK-7m to it.
•For this procedure, turn the BK-7m upside-down, and place a bunch of newspapers or magazines under the four corners or at both ends to prevent damage to the but­tons and controls. Also, you should try to orient the BK-7m so no buttons or controls get damaged.
r
18
NOTE
When turning the BK-7m upside-down, handle with care to avoid dropping it, or allowing it to fall or tip over.
Page 19
Backing Module BK-7m

Listening through headphones

r
Listening through headphones
You can use headphones to enjoy the BK-7m without disturbing those around you, such as at night.
1.
Plug the headphones into the PHONES socket located on the BK-7m’s rear panel.
If you don’t want to disturb others, switch off the external amplification system, because the BK-7m’s OUTPUT sockets remain active even when you con­nect headphones.
2.
Use the BK-7m’s [VOLUME] knob to adjust the headphone volume.
Cautions when using headphones
•To prevent damage to the cord’s internal conductors, avoid rough handling. When using headphones, mainly try to handle either the plug or the headset.
• Your headphones may be damaged if the volume of a device is already turned up when you plug them in. Minimize the volume before you plug in the head­phones.
• Excessive input will not only damage your hearing, but may also strain the headphones. Please enjoy music at a reasonable volume.
•Use headphones fitted with a stereo 1/4” phone plug.

Turning the power on/off

Once the connections have been completed, turn on the power to your various devices in the order specified. By turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and other devices.

Turning the power on

1.
Switch off the external amplification sys­tem.
2.
Turn the [VOLUME] knob all the way to the left to minimize the volume.
VOLUME
3.
Press and hold the [POWER] switch until the “Starting Up…” message appears in the dis­play.
The power will turn on, an opening message will appear in the BK-7m’s screen, and then the main page will appear.
After a brief interval, the BK-7m will be ready to pro­duce sound.
NOTE
This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief inter­val (a few seconds) after power up is required before the unit will operate normally.
4.
Switch on your amplification system or con­nect a pair of headphones (see p. 19).
5.
Use the [VOLUME] knob to adjust the vol­ume.
19
Page 20
Backing Module BK-7m
Before you start using the BK-7m
NOTE
See “Wizard Connection” on p. 22 for how to ensure that the BK-7m receives MIDI messages from an external device.

Turning the power off

1.
Turn the [VOLUME] knob all the way to the left to minimize the volume.
NOTE
Never switch off the BK-7m while playback or recording is running or while data are being read from, or written to, an external USB memory.
2.
Switch off your external amplification sys­tem.
3.
Press the BK-7m’s [POWER] switch.
The display will go dark and the power will turn off.
Demo of the BK-7m
Your BK-7m contains a demo that introduces all of its highlights. It might be a good idea to try it out now. The demo is self-explanatory, so we’ll just show you how to start and stop it.
NOTE
You will need to connect an external display to take advantage of the BK-7m’s demo function. See “Connecting a television set” on p. 17.
1.
Simultaneously press the [MENU] and [EXIT] buttons.
NOTE
If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the [POWER] switch, then unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Refer to “Connecting the AC adaptor” on p. 15.
The BK-7m plays back a few Music Styles and displays a few pictures.
2.
Press the [EXIT] button to leave the demo function.
NOTE
No data for the music that is played back will be output from MIDI OUT.
NOTE
All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than private, personal enjoyment is a viola­tion of applicable laws.
r
20
Page 21
6. Basic operation of the BK-7m
Backing Module BK-7m
Basic operation of the BK-7m
r

About the display and cursor operation

This section introduces the information that appears on the main page in the BK-7m’s display and how to navi­gate the menu.

Main page

Current measure Time signature
Selected file type: .STL, .SMF, .WAV, .mp3
Real-time part field: UP1, UP2, LWR, MBS
Selected sound

Moving the cursor and setting parameter values

1.
Rotate the dial to move the cursor to the parameter whose value you want to change.
Tempo setting
Cursor
Name of the loaded file
One Touch indica­tion

Moving between windows

Here is how to navigate the menu to select the setting you want to change.
1.
Press [MENU] button.
MENU
The display changes to:
This page allows you to select the function group that contains the setting you want to change (indica­tions followed by a “ ” symbol mean that you can select other display pages).
2.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the entry of the desired function group.
For this example, we will select “Global”.
3.
Press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial (“PUSH”) to go to the “Global” function group.
The display changes to:
2.
Press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to confirm your selection.
The setting field of the selected parameter is dis­played in reverse.
In our example, we want to change the tempo.
3.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to change the value.
4.
Press and release the dial to confirm your setting.
The parameter’s setting field once again appears on a dark background and the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial can once again be used to select another parameter.
On this display page, “Display Brightness” and “Tun­ing” can be changed directly. The remaining entries are followed by a “ ” symbol, meaning that they provide access to additional display pages.
4.
Try to select other “Menu” functions by pro­ceeding as follows:
(a) Press the [EXIT] button once to return to the
“Menu” page.
(b) Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select an entry,
then press the dial to go to the corresponding function group or setting.
(c) Press and hold the [EXIT] button to return to the
BK-7m’s main page.
The [EXIT] button stops flashing.
21
Page 22
Backing Module BK-7m

Wizard Connection

7. Wizard Connection
Your BK-7m contains a “Wizard Connection” that tells you step by step how to set up the BK-7m for MIDI communica­tion. This wizard saves you a lot of time, which is why we recommend using it each time you connect a different MIDI device to the BK-7m.
4.
Press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the

Generic procedure

Usually, when you connect an external instrument to the BK-7m’s MIDI IN socket, a display page appears to signal that the “Wizard Connection” function has detected a MIDI instrument and can be used to make the desired MIDI settings.
If that message is not displayed, the external instrument probably doesn’t transmit Active Sens­ing (FEH) messages. To start the BK-7m’s “Wizard Connection” function, simply press any key on the external instrument’s keyboard. Alternatively, you can select the “Wizard Connection” function by hand: [MENU] button ‰ “Wizard Connection”.
1.
Perform all required connections, taking care to also connect a MIDI cable.
See “Connecting the BK-7m to an amplifier, mixer, etc.” on p. 15 and “Connecting a MIDI device” on p. 16.
NOTE
If you want to work with a Roland digital piano, we recom­mend also connecting the BK-7m’s MIDI OUT socket to the digital piano’s MIDI IN socket. That way, your Roland piano is automatically set to “Local Off”, which is usually more convenient.
2.
Press the BK-7m’s [POWER] switch.
“Wizard Connection” function.
Press the [EXIT] button if you don’t need the “Wizard Connection” function. In that case, the BK-7m goes on using the last configuration you selected. If you do not make any settings, this display page disap­pears automatically after 5 seconds.
5.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select an instrument category, then press the dial.
The following categories are available:
Category Explanation
DIGITAL PIANO Digital pianos made by Roland and
other manufacturers.
ACCORDION Roland V-Accordion and accordions
made by other manufacturers.
MASTER KEYBOARD
GUITAR Guitar with MIDI interface (Roland
DIGITAL ORGAN Classic organs made by Roland/Rodg-
Master keyboards made by Roland/ Edirol and other manufacturers.
GI-20, etc.)
ers and other manufacturers.
Wait until the main page appears.
3.
Power on the external MIDI device (Digital piano, V-Accordion, etc.).
If the MIDI connection between the external MIDI device’s MIDI OUT socket and the BK-7m’s MIDI IN socket is correct, a “MIDI Device Connected” page appears to signal that the BK-7m has detected a MIDI instrument.
r
22
COMPUTER/ SEQUENCER
6.
Depending on the category you select, the
The BK-7m acts as multitimbral tone generator for a computer.
Wizard now asks you a series of questions.
Please follow the instructions shown in the display. See “Details about the ‘Wizard Connection’ catego­ries” on p. 23.
7.
At the end of the selected procedure, the BK-7m asks you to save the settings.
8.
Press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to save your settings.
The display briefly confirms the operation and then returns to the main page.
Page 23
Backing Module BK-7m

Details about the ‘Wizard Connection’ categories

r
Press the [EXIT] button if you prefer not to save these settings. In that case, the BK-7m goes on using the last configuration you selected.
The settings of the last MIDI Set you saved will be loaded each time you switch on the BK-7m. There is thus no need to use the “Wizard Connection” func­tion as long as you don’t change your MIDI setup.
NOTE
In addition to the parameters that can be saved to the “User1” MIDI Set, the “Wizard Connection” also saves other settings. See page 87 for details.
Details about the ‘Wizard Connection’ categories
Depending on the category and option inside that cate­gory, the BK-7m may ask you to play a few notes on the external instrument. This allows it to automatically set the correct MIDI channels and to make several other useful settings.
See also “‘Wizard Connection’ MIDI channel settings” on p. 26 for an overview of the other settings performed by the “Wizard Connection” function.
•the digital piano is already on when you switch on the BK-7m. In “Soft Thru: Piano” mode, the BK-7m transmits the note messages received via MIDI IN back to its MIDI OUT socket. Those messages are then used to trigger the digital piano’s tone generator. The piano’s “Local Off” setting indeed means that its keyboard is no longer connected to its internal tone generator.
Soft Thru: Piano
MIDI OUT
The keyboard’s messages are returned to the piano.
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
What you play on the keyboard is transmitted to the BK-7m. The piano’s tone generator does not receive these messages.

‘DIGITAL PIANO’ category

Select “ROLAND” for a digital piano made by Roland that transmits on MIDI channel 1 by default.
•The only step will be “Wizard Settings will be saved” (see step (7) above).
Select “OTHERS” if your digital piano transmits on a dif­ferent MIDI channel. Here, there are two steps:
•“Play a note on piano keyboard” ‰ Press any key on your digital piano.
•“Wizard Settings will be saved” (see step (7) above).
NOTE
If necessary, set the digital piano’s MIDI transmit and receive channels to the same number.
•The digital piano can be used to play the BK-7m’s real-time parts and to control the Arranger.
• Changing the status of the [SPLIT] button allows you to alternate between two chord recognition modes: “Pianist” ([SPLIT] button dark) and “Intelligent” ([SPLIT] button lights). See “Using Split mode” on p. 39 for details.
• See page 27 for how to switch the real-time parts on and off.
About ‘Soft Thru: Piano’
The “DIGITAL PIANO” settings automatically select the “Soft Thru: Piano” setting, which means that the BK-7m transmits a “Local Off” message to the piano when you switch it on. This only works if the follow­ing conditions are met:
•the BK-7m’s MIDI OUT socket is connected to the digital piano’s MIDI IN socket.
This connection is necessary to ensure that the digital piano’s tone generator does not receive the chords you play in the left half (while the [SPLIT] button lights), because the chord notes are usually only used to specify the arranger’s key.
NOTE
The digital piano’s “Local” parameter is not reset when you disconnect the MIDI cables. You may have to do this manu­ally (see the digital piano’s owner’s manual). In most instances, however, switching the piano off and back on will reset the piano’s “Local” parameter to “On”.

‘ACCORDION’ category

Select “V-ACCORDION” if you want to control the BK-7m from a Roland FR-series instrument. Its treble, orchestral, bass & chord, and (if available) Free Bass sec­tions will trigger the UP1, UP2, LWR and MBS parts respectively. The chords you play with the chord buttons (left hand) are used to “feed” the BK-7m’s Arranger.
•The only step will be “Wizard Settings will be saved” (see step (7) on page 22).
NOTE
The BK-7m’s wizard assumes that the FR-series accordion uses the default MIDI channel numbers.
23
Page 24
Backing Module BK-7m
Wizard Connection
Select “OTHERS1” if you are using an accordion fitted with a MIDI interface. Its treble, chord 1 and bass sec­tions will trigger the UP1 (+ UP2), LWR and MBS parts respectively. The chords you play with the chord buttons (left hand) are used to “feed” the BK-7m’s Arranger.
Here, there are four steps:
•“Play a note on treble section” ‰ Press any key or
button of the treble keyboard.
•“Play a note on chord section” ‰ Press any chord
button (left -hand section).
•“Play a note on bass section” ‰ Press any bass but-
ton (left -hand section).
•“Wizard Settings will be saved” (see step (7) on
page 22).
NOTE
See page 27 for how to switch the real-time parts on and off.
Select “OTHERS2” if you are using an accordion fitted with a MIDI interface that transmits its MIDI messages related to chords within one octave and “dim” chords without the root note.
Here, there are four steps:
•“Play a note on treble section” ‰ Press any key or
button of the treble keyboard.
•“Play a note on chord section” ‰ Press any chord
button (left -hand section).
•“Play a note on bass section” ‰ Press any bass but-
ton (left -hand section).
•“Wizard Settings will be saved” (see step (7) on
page 22).
The “Wizard Connection” function sets the BK-7m’s chord recognition to “Accordionist1” or “Accordionist2” (irrespective of whether or not the [SPLIT] button lights) and activates the “Split” and “Arranger Type” filters of the “Performance Hold” function to ensure that those settings don’t change when you recall another Performance memory or One Touch setting.
NOTE
Roland recommends leaving the [SPLIT] button off while you are using an “ACCORDION” category setting.
‘MASTER KEYBOARD’ category
Select “ONE CHANNEL” if your MIDI master keyboard only transmits on one MIDI channel. That MIDI channel will be used to control the BK-7m’s real-time parts UP1, UP2, LWR and MBS (only the ones whose button lights) and to “feed” the Arranger with chord information.
Here, there are two steps:
•“Play a note on master keyboard” ‰ Press any key
on the external MIDI device.
•“Wizard Settings will be saved” (see step (7) on
page 22).
r
NOTE
The “Type” setting (page 60) depends on the status of the [SPLIT] button: “Pianist” ([SPLIT] off) or “Intelligent” ([SPLIT] on).
Select “MULTI CHANNEL” if your MIDI master keyboard transmits on several MIDI channels simultaneously. The MIDI channels for the UP1, UP2, LWR and MBS parts are detected during the “Wizard” procedure. The chords you play in the lower zone (LWR) of your master keyboard are also used by the BK-7m’s Arranger.
Here, there are five steps:
•“Play a note on Upper 1 section” ‰ Press any key in
the highest (rightmost) zone to specify the MIDI channel for the UP1 part.
•“Play a note on Upper 2 section” ‰ Press any key in
the second zone from the right to specify the MIDI channel for the UP2 part.
•“Play a note on Lower section” ‰ Press any key in
the third zone from the right to specify the MIDI channel for the LWR part.
•“Play a note on Bass section” ‰ Press any key in the
third zone from the right to specify the MIDI channel for the MBS part.
•“Wizard Settings will be saved” (see step (7) on
page 22).
The “Wizard Connection” function sets the BK-7m’s chord recognition to “Intelligent” (irrespective of whether or not the [SPLIT] button lights) and acti­vates the “Split” and “Arranger Type” filters of the “Performance Hold” function to ensure that those settings don’t change when you recall another Per­formance memory or One Touch setting.
NOTE
Roland recommends leaving the [SPLIT] button off while you are using the “MULTI CHANNEL” setting.

‘GUITAR’ category

Select this category to control the BK-7m from a guitar that is connected to a Roland guitar–MIDI interface (like the GI-20).
Here, there are two steps:
•“Play a guitar string” ‰ Play a note on any string on
your guitar.
•“Wizard Settings will be saved” (see step (7) on
page 22).
NOTE
By default, some guitar–MIDI interfaces use separate MIDI channels for each string. See the owner’s manual of your interface for how to ensure that the same channel is used for all strings.
An optional footswitch connected to the rear-panel PEDAL SWITCH/EXPRESSION socket is automatically assigned the “Chord Recognition OFF” function,
24
Page 25
Backing Module BK-7m
Details about the ‘Wizard Connection’ categories
r
allowing you to control which notes you play on your guitar should be recognized by the BK-7m’s Arranger (see p. 65).
The “Wizard Connection” function sets the BK-7m’s chord recognition to “Guitarist” (irrespective of whether or not the [SPLIT] button lights) and acti­vates the “Split” and “Arranger Type” filters of the “Performance Hold” function to ensure that those settings don’t change when you recall another Per­formance memory or One Touch setting.
NOTE
Roland recommends leaving the [SPLIT] button off while you are using this setting.

‘DIGITAL ORGAN’ category

Select “CHURCH ORGAN1” if your organ transmits on MIDI channels 12, 13 and 14.
•The only step will be “Wizard Settings will be saved” (see step (7) on page 22).
Select “CHURCH ORGAN2” if your organ transmits on MIDI channels 1, 2 and 3.
•The only step will be “Wizard Settings will be saved” (see step (7) on page 22).
The notes played on Manual II (Swell) and Manual I (Great) as well as the bass pedal board control the BK-7m’s real-time parts UP1, UP2, LWR and MBS. The chords played on Manual I (Great) are also used by the Arranger’s NTA section (for chord recognition).
The “Wizard Connection” function sets the BK-7m’s chord recognition to “Intelligent” (irrespective of whether or not the [SPLIT] button lights) and acti­vates the “Split” and “Arranger Type” filters of the “Performance Hold” function to ensure that those settings don’t change when you recall another Per­formance memory or One Touch setting.
•“Wizard Settings will be saved” (see step (7) on
page 22).
The “Wizard Connection” function sets the BK-7m’s chord recognition to “Intelligent” (irrespective of whether or not the [SPLIT] button lights) and acti­vates the “Split” and “Arranger Type” filters of the “Performance Hold” function to ensure that those settings don’t change when you recall another Per­formance memory or One Touch setting.
NOTE
Roland recommends leaving the [SPLIT] button off while you are using the “MULTI CHANNEL” setting.
NOTE
Roland recommends leaving the [SPLIT] button off while you are using one of these settings.

‘COMPUTER/SEQUENCER’ category

This “Wizard Connection” option configures the BK-7m for use as a multitimbral sound module that is con­trolled by a software sequencer running on your com­puter.
•The only step will be “Wizard Settings will be saved” (see step (7) on page 22).
NOTE
This option disables MIDI data reception by the BK-7m’s Arranger and real-time parts, because all 16 MIDI channels are already taken.
Select “ELECTRONIC ORGAN” if your organ transmits on other MIDI channels than the ones selected for “CHURCH ORGAN1” and “CHURCH ORGAN2”. In this mode, the BK-7m’s wizard detects the MIDI channel numbers to be assigned to UP1, UP2, LWR and MBS. The chords you play on the lower manual (LWR) are also used by the BK-7m’s Arranger.
Here, there are four steps:
•“Play a note on Upper section” ‰ Press any key on
the upper manual to specify the MIDI channel for the UP1 and UP2 parts.
•“Play a note on Lower section” ‰ Press any key on
the lower manual to specify the MIDI channel for the LWR part.
•“Play a note on Pedal section” ‰ Press any pedal-
board key to specify the MIDI channel for the MBS part.
25
Page 26
Backing Module BK-7m
Wizard Connection
‘Wizard Connection’ MIDI channel settings
Category Type BK-7m’s real-time parts
DIGITAL PIANO ROLAND UP1, UP2, LWR, MBS, NTA (Note-to-Arranger) 1 Entire keyboard
OTHERS UP1, UP2, LWR, MBS, NTA (Note-to-Arranger) 1~16*
ACCORDION V-ACCORDION UP1 1 Treble
UP2 4 Orchestra
LWR + NTA (Note-to-Arranger) 3 Chords
MBS + NTA (Note-to-Arranger) 2 Bass/Free Bass
NTA (Note-to-Arranger) 5 Orchestral Bass
NTA (Note-to-Arranger) 6 Orchestral Chord
NTA (Note-to-Arranger) 7 Orchestral Free Bass
OTHERS1 or OTHERS2
MASTER KEYBOARD ONE CHANNEL UP1, UP2, LWR, MBS, NTA (Note-to-Arranger) 1~16* Entire keyboard
MULTI CHANNEL
UP1 + UP2 1~16* Treble
LWR + NTA (Note-to-Arranger) 1~16* Chord 1
MBS 1~16* Bass
UP1 1~16* Highest zone
UP2 1~16* Second zone from right
LWR + NTA (Note-to-Arranger) 1~16* Third zone from right
MIDI channel
Sections
Entire keyboard
MBS 1~16* Lowest zone
GUITAR UP1, UP2, LWR, MBS, NTA (Note-to-Arranger) 1~16* All notes
DIGITAL ORGAN CHURCH
ORGAN1
CHURCH ORGAN2
ELECTRONIC ORGAN
COMPUTER Song part 1~Song part 16 1~16 Recorder tracks 1~16
[*] The wizard detects the MIDI channel(s) on which the external instrument is transmitting and sets it/them automatically.
UP1 + UP2 13 Manual II (Swell)
LWR + NTA (Note-to-Arranger) 12 Manual I (Great)
MBS 14 Bass pedals
UP1 + UP2 2 Manual II (Swell)
LWR + NTA (Note-to-Arranger) 1 Manual I (Great)
MBS 3 Bass pedals
UP1 + UP2 1~16 Upper manual
LWR 1~16 Lower manual
MBS 1~16 Pedal section
r
26
Page 27
Backing Module BK-7m
Playing the BK-7m’s real-time parts
r
8. Playing the BK-7m’s real-time parts
Your BK-7m contains four real-time parts that can be controlled via MIDI: UP1, UP2, LWR and MBS. Feel free to use only one of them at a time or to control them simultaneously. You can assign the desired sounds (or “Tones”) to each of these parts.
See page 91 for a list of the available sounds.

Selecting Tones for the real-time parts

Switching real-time parts on and off

1.
Switch on the [PART] button (its indicator lights).
PAR T
On the BK-7m, the sounds you can assign to the real­time parts are called “Tones”. The BK-7m allows you to assign any of the available Tones to any of the four real-time parts.
Tones can be selected in three ways:

Selecting Tones using the [PART] button

1.
Press the [PART] button.
The display now shows you which Tones are currently assigned to the four real-time parts:
The [1], [2], [3] and [4] buttons are now used to switch the real-time parts on and off:
While the [PART] indicator lights, the indicators of the [1], [2], [3] and [4] buttons show which real-time parts are currently active.
2.
Press the [1], [2], [3] or [4] button to switch the corresponding part (MBS, LWR, UP2 or UP1) on (indicator lights) or off (indicator goes dark).
See “‘Wizard Connection’ MIDI channel settings” on p. 26 for the MIDI channels the real-time parts receive on. This obviously depends on the selected category and option (see p. 22).
2.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the real-time whose Tone assignment you want to change.
3.
Press the dial to jump to the following page:
4.
If the Tone you need belongs to another family (see p. 91), press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial.
If the Tone is part of the currently selected family, you can skip to step (6).
5.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the desired family, then press the dial to confirm your selection.
6.
Rotate the dial to select the desired Tone.
The names of the BK-7m’s SuperNATURAL sounds start with an “N” (“N.Trombone” and “N.Tenor Sax”).
27
Page 28
Backing Module BK-7m
Playing the BK-7m’s real-time parts
NOTE
The SuperNATURAL sounds can only be assigned to the UP1 part.
7.
Play a few notes on the external keyboard to audition the sound.
If the part is active (see p. 27), you should now hear the newly selected Tone.
8.
Press [EXIT] to leave the Tone selection page.
Using the [UP1], [UP2], [LWR] and [MBS] buttons to select Tones
1.
Press and hold the [UP1], [UP2], [LWR] or [MBS] button.
The display now show a list of Tones where the cur­rently selected sound is displayed in reverse:
2.
If the Tone you need belongs to another family (see p. 91), press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial.
If the Tone is part of the currently selected family, you can skip to step (4).
3.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the desired family, then press the dial to confirm your selection.

Selecting a Tone on the main page

1.
If the main page is not displayed, press and hold the [EXIT] button until it appears.
The name of one of the four real-time parts and the sound assigned to it are shown in the bottom left corner:
2.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the part indication, then press the dial.
3.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the real-time part whose Tone assignment you want to change.
4.
Rotate the dial to select the desired Tone.
5.
Press [EXIT] to leave the Tone selection page.
The name of the Tone currently used by this part is displayed to its right.
4.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to move the cursor towards the name of the Tone currently assigned to the selected real-time part.
5.
Press the dial.
6.
If the Tone you need belongs to another family (see p. 91), press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial.
If the Tone is part of the currently selected family, you can skip to step (8).
r
28
Page 29
7.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the desired family, then press the dial to confirm your selection.
Parameter
Backing Module BK-7m
Selecting Tones for the real-time parts
Supernatural sound controls
Rx MIDI Message
Explanation
r
8.
Rotate the dial to select the desired Tone.
9.
Press [EXIT] to leave the Tone selection page.
NOTE
You can also select the BK-7m’s Tones via MIDI. Be aware, however, that if the BK-7m receives a sound select cluster (bank select + program change message) for which there is no Tone, the display shows “---” instead of a Tone name and the real-time part in question no longer sounds.

Selecting SuperNATURAL sounds (UP1 part)

The BK-7m contains two high-quality brass Tones based on Roland’s SuperNATURAL technology. These are called “N.Trombone” and “N.Tenor Sax”. See the “Tone List” on p. 91.
Various expressive performance elements typical of brass instruments were difficult to play on a keyboard, but can now be reproduced without special operations and played expressively with a realistic tone. If you play legato, the sound changes smoothly between notes. If you play staccato, the sound has a crisp attack.
If you play a note and then press a second key without releasing the previous key, only the second note sounds (monophonic). If, however, you press several keys simul­taneously, the UP1 part plays chords (polyphonic).
Other parameters that can be controlled in realtime are:
Supernatural sound controls
Parameter
Rx MIDI Message
Explanation
Noise Level CC 16
Default: 64
Play Stability CC 17
Default: 64
Growl Sens CC 18
Default: 0 (no growl)
Staccato CC 80
0~63: Normal, 64~127: Stac­cato
Fall CC81
0~63: Normal, 64~127: Fall
This adjusts the amount of breath and keys noise.
Adjusts the accuracy of the player. Using values near 0, the initial pitch at the begin­ning of each note will be unstable. There will also be a greater spread between the timing of each player’s notes. Using values near 7F, the pitch at the beginning of each note and the timing of the notes will both be accurate.
Adjusts the amount of growl for strongly played notes. Using values near 0, the amount of growl at the beginning of each note will be minimal. Using values near 7F, the beginning of each note will have the maximum amount of growl. The more strongly you play the keyboard, the stron­ger this effect will be
If you set staccato, the played notes result dis­tinctly separate while also short in length.
If you set Fall, the release of sound will behave in the manner distinctive of brass instruments, mean­ing that the volume will also decrease.
Discontinuous pitch change
Dynamics Modulation Change the dynamic of
Pitch Bender The discontinuous pitch
change is typical of brass instruments, instead of the normal smooth pitch change. When you apply a downward bend, the sound will behave in the manner distinctive of brass instruments, mean­ing that the volume will also decrease.
played note.
29
Page 30
Backing Module BK-7m

Music Style functions

9. Music Style functions
The BK-7m contains a function that plays back automatic accompaniments called “Music Styles”. This section explains how to take advantage of the BK-7m’s accompaniments.

Volume balance between the backing and the real-time parts

If the Music Style accompaniment is too loud or too soft with respect to the real-time parts you are using, you can change the balance with the [BALANCE] knob:
BALANCE
Turn it towards “PART” to make the accompaniment softer, or towards “BACKING” if the real-time parts are too loud with respect to the accompaniment.

About the Music Styles

The BK-7m can generate interactive accompaniments based on the Music Style you select. Each Music Style is a typical accompaniment for a given musical genre. The BK-7m comes with 433 internal Music Styles divided over 10 families (see the “RHYTHM FAMILY” section on the front panel).
The melodic accompaniment parts of the selected Music Styles follow the chords you play on the external MIDI controller (keyboard, MIDI accordion, MIDI guitar, etc.). The BK-7m uses special MIDI parts to receive this note information: “NTA”, which is short for “Note-to­Arranger”. Your MIDI controller must therefore transmit its note information for the accompaniment function (Arranger) on a MIDI channel assigned to an NTA part.

Using Music Styles

The “interactive” aspect about the Music Styles is that you can change the key of the accompaniment simply by playing different notes or chord on your MIDI con­troller. Additionally, you can select different variations (more or less complex arrangements) for the active Music Style. The BK-7m provides several buttons for this.
START/STOP
This button is used to start and stop Music Style play­back. While a Music Style is running, the button’s indicator flashes red on the first beat of each bar, and green on the remaining beats.
NOTE
You can also start (and stop) Music Style playback simply by playing on the external MIDI controller. See the next function.
r
30
Page 31
Backing Module BK-7m
Using Music Styles
r
SYNC START
This button activates and switches off the “Sync Start” or “Sync Start/Stop” function. Pressing it sev­eral times allows you to select one of the following options:
Function
Sync Start Lights red Music Style playback can be
Sync Start/ Stop
Dark Music Style playback needs to
[SYNC START]
indicator
Lights green Music Style playback can be
Explanation
started by playing a note or chord on the MIDI controller. Press [START/STOP] to stop Music Style Playback.
started by playing a note or chord on the MIDI controller. Playback will stop when you release all keys.
be started and stopped using the [START/STOP] button.
VARIATION
[4] This is the most complex arrangement.
Explanation
Consider selecting it for the bridge or the final chorus sections of a song.
Note that the VARIATION patterns are repeated (played back in a loop) until select a different pattern or stop Music Style playback.
INTRO
Selects an introduction, which is usually used at the beginning of a song. You can, however, also select this pattern for other song sections. The behavior of the Intro pattern depends on when you press the [INTRO] button:
[INTRO] Behavior
Pressed before starting Music Style playback
The indicator lights. When you start Music Style playback, the Arranger first plays a musical introduction. (This pattern is played back only once).
VARIATION [1], [2], [3], [4]
These buttons are used to select the complexity (number of parts) of the Music Style’s arrangement:
VARIATION
[1] The simplest accompaniment pattern. A
[2] A slightly more complex pattern you may
[3] This pattern would be a good choice for
Explanation
goof choice for the first of the songs you play.
want to use for subsequent verses.
the first chorus.
Pressed during Music Style play­back
The indicator flashes to signal that the INTRO pattern will begin on the next downbeat. When the intro is finished, the BK-7m returns to the previously selected VARIATION pattern.
There are, in fact, four different INTRO patterns, that can be selected using the VARIATION [1], [2], [3] and [4] buttons. Again, the VARIATION buttons determine the complexity of the arrangement.
31
Page 32
Backing Module BK-7m
Music Style functions
ENDING
This button allows you to end your songs with a suit­able closing section if you don’t want to simply stop Music Style playback. The behavior of the Ending pat­tern depends on when you press the [ENDING] but­ton:
[ENDING] Behavior
Pressed before starting Music Style playback
Pressed during Music Style play­back
The indicator lights. When you start Music Style playback, the Arranger plays a musical ending. At the end of the phrase, playback stops.
The indicator flashes to signal that the ENDING pattern will begin on the next downbeat. When the ending is finished, Music Style playback stops.
AUTO FILL IN
When this button lights, the BK-7m plays a transition before switching to the newly selected VARIATION pattern. Example: if the VARIATION [1] pattern is run­ning, pressing the [4] button will not switch to that pattern right away—the BK-7m first plays a fill-in to announce the new song section.
NOTE
The duration of the fill-ins (transitions) can be halved if you like. See “Fill In Half Bar” on p. 60.

Selecting Music Styles

1.
Press a RHYTHM FAMILY button to select the Music Style family.
There are four different ENDING patterns, that can be selected using the VARIATION [1], [2], [3] and [4] but­tons. Again, the VARIATION buttons determine the complexity of the arrangement.
BASS INV
This button is used to switch the “Bass Inversion” function on or off. While the button is dark, the Music Style’s bass part always plays the fundamental of your notes or chords. Example: if you play a chord consisting of the notes C, E and G (which is recog­nized as a C major chord), the bass part plays a C.
If the [BASS INV] button lights, the Music Styles bass part uses the lowest notes of the chords you play. Example: if you play a chord consisting of the notes E, G and C (still a C major chord), the bass part plays an E. This function therefore gives you more artistic licence.
The indicator of the button you press lights and the display shows a list of the Music Styles that belong to this family:
In the example shown above, we pressed the [LIVE BAND] button.
2.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the desired Music Style, then press the dial to confirm your selection.
r
32
Page 33

Playing back Music Styles

Let us now take a closer look at the interactive aspects of the BK-7m’s Music Styles and at how to use them.
1.
Connect your MIDI controller (see p. 16).
If necessary, follow the instructions of the “Wizard Connection” function (see p. 22).
2.
Set the BK-7m’s [VOLUME] knob to a rea­sonable level (about 1/4).
VOLUME
Backing Module BK-7m
The main page displays the name of the last chord the BK-7m recognized:
7.
Press the [START/STOP] button to start Music Style playback.
Playing back Music Styles
r
3.
Set the [BALANCE] knob to the center posi­tion.
BALANCE
4.
Press the [INTRO] button (it lights) to start Music Style playback with an introduction.
The [START/STOP] indicator lights and the BK-7m starts playing back the introductory phrase.
8.
Play different chords on your MIDI control­ler and listen to the effect this has on the Music Style.
9.
Switch on the [AUTO FILL IN] button (it lights).
This means that when you select a different VARIA­TION pattern, the BK-7m will play a transition (fill-in) before switching to the new pattern.
10.
Press a VARIATION [1], [2], [3] or [4] button to select a more complex or a simpler accompaniment.
5.
Press the VARIATION [1], [2], [3] or [4] but­ton to select the complexity of the INTRO pattern.
6.
Play a chord on your MIDI controller.
See “‘Wizard Connection’ MIDI channel settings” on p. 26 for the MIDI channels assigned to the BK-7m’s NTA parts. These parts analyze the chords that are used to transpose the Music Style in real time.
• If you press it before the last beat of the current measure, the fill-in starts immediately and lasts until the end of the current measure, then the newly selected VARIATION pattern is played back.
• If you press the desired VARIATION button on the last beat of a bar, the fill-in starts at the next downbeat and lasts an entire bar. Only then will the BK-7m switch to the newly selected VARIATION pattern.
11.
If necessary, you can change the Music Style’s tempo:
33
Page 34
Backing Module BK-7m
Music Style functions
•Press the TEMPO [√] or [®] button to decrease or increase the tempo.
•Press the [TAP TEMPO] button at least three times at the desired tempo.

Using the ‘One Touch’ function

The ONE TOUCH memories help you select Tones for the real-time parts that match the atmosphere of the cur­rent Music Style. There are four such ONE TOUCH mem­ories per Music Style.
1.
Select the desired Music Style.
See page 32.
2.
Switch on the [ONE TOUCH] button (its indi­cator lights).
The BK-7m calculates the intervals between your presses and sets the corresponding tempo value.
NOTE
Simultaneously press the TEMPO [] and [®] buttons (“STANDARD”) to return to the Music Style’s preset tempo.
12.
Press the [ENDING] button to end Music Style playback with a suitable closing sec­tion.
You could also stop playback simply by pressing the [START/STOP] button or by releasing all keys on your MIDI controller (see “Sync Start/Stop” on p. 31).
While Music Style or SMF song playback is stopped, the [TAP TEMPO] button flashes in blue to indicate the selected tempo.
The indicator of one of the four buttons to its right lights to indicate which ONE TOUCH memory is cur­rently selected.
3.
Press the ONE TOUCH [1], [2], [3] or [4] but­ton.
The indicator of that button lights and the “OTC” message as well as the number of the selected button appear in the lower right corner of the display.
4.
Start playback of the Music Style.
See page 33.
5.
Play a melody on the connected MIDI con­troller.
See “‘Wizard Connection’ MIDI channel settings” on p. 26 for the MIDI channels used by the BK-7m’s real­time parts.
6.
Now press another ONE TOUCH button than the one that is currently active.
7.
Again play a melody on the external MIDI controller.
The newly selected ONE TOUCH memory has recalled a different sound for the melody part. Note that the ONE TOUCH function also recalls other settings, like the tempo, INTRO/ENDING, etc.
r
34
NOTE
The BK-7m has a function that allows you to exclude cer­tain settings when a new ONE TOUCH memory is selected. See “One Touch Hold” on p. 62.
Page 35
Backing Module BK-7m
Using the BK-7m as a USB player
r
10. Using the BK-7m as a USB player
This section explains how to playback MIDI (SMF) and audio songs stored on an optional USB memory. Note that it is also possible to select Music Styles on that device and to use them in the same way as the internal Styles. New song and Music Style files can be copied to the USB memory using your computer as you purchase them.
Getting ready to use the BK-7m as a USB player
1.
On your computer, copy the new song and Music Style files to an optional USB memory (memory stick).
NOTE
Use USB memory sold by Roland (M-UF-series). We cannot guarantee operation if any other USB memory is used.
2.
Connect the USB memory to your BK-7m.
NOTE
Carefully insert the optional USB memory all the way into the port until it is firmly in place.
NOTE
The BK-7m supports USB memories with a capacity of up to 2TB.

Selecting a song or Music Style on a USB memory

1.
Connect an optional USB memory to the BK-7m.
After a few seconds, the display shows the contents of the USB memory.
Press the [USB MEM] button if you inserted the USB memory at an earlier stage and now want to return to this display page.
The icons to the left of the file names indicate the file type:
Icon Explanation
Music Style file
SMF file
Audio MP3 file
Audio WAV file
File types the BK-7m can read and play back
Extension Format
Music Styles .stl
Standard MIDI Files (SMF)
Audio files
.mid 0 or 1
.kar
.mp3 • MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3
• Sampling frequency:
44.1kHz
• Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/ 64/80/96/112/128/160/ 192/224/256/320kbps, VBR (variable bit rate)
.wav • 16-bit linear
• Sampling frequency:
44.1kHz
• Stereo/mono
Folder
2.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the file you want to play back.
3.
Press the dial to load the file.
The [USB MEM] button now lights to indicate that you selected a file on the USB memory.
If the file you need is located inside a folder, you must first select that folder, press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to see its contents and then select the file. If you opened a folder by mistake, press the [EXIT] button to return to a higher level.
NOTE
Press and hold the [EXIT] button to return to the main page.
35
Page 36
Backing Module BK-7m
Using the BK-7m as a USB player

Playing back a song or Music Style from a USB memory

If you selected a Music Style, see “Playing back Music Styles” on p. 33, because operation is the same as for internal Music Styles.
In the following, we will therefore only show you how to play back song files located on a USB memory.
NOTE
The BK-7m has no internal memory where you could store SMF or audio files.
1.
Select a song (SMF or audio file) on the USB memory.
See page 35.
2.
Press the [START/STOP] button to start play­back.
This button is also labeled [®÷π].
•Press the [TAP TEMPO] button at least three times at the desired tempo. (This function is not available if you selected an audio file (WAV or mp3.)
The BK-7m calculates the intervals between your presses and sets the corresponding tempo value.
NOTE
Simultaneously press the TEMPO [] and [®] buttons (“STANDARD”) to return to the Music Style’s preset tempo.
4.
Press the [®÷π] button again to pause song playback.
The [®÷π] button goes dark.
5.
Press [®÷π] yet again to resume playback.
6.
Press the [SYNC START] button (ª) to stop playback
The [®÷π] button’s indicator lights and song playback starts.
3.
If necessary, you can change the song’s playback tempo:
•Press the TEMPO [√] or [®] button to decrease or increase the tempo.
NOTE
If you set a tempo value close to the upper or lower limit for an MP3 or WAV file, playback may sound a little strange.
You can use the following buttons to control song playback (see the gray legends):
Button Explanation
[®÷π] Starts or pauses song playback.
[ª] Stops song playback.
[º] Rewinds the song.
[] Fast-forwards the song.
r
36
Page 37
11. Other important functions
This section presents other important function you may need regularly.
(b) Rotate the dial to select the mode, then press the

Changing the key

This function allows you to transpose the BK-7m’s pitch in semi-tone steps. Depending on the mode setting, this transposition applies to all sections or just a specific setting.
dial.
Mode Explanation
Song Only song playback is transposed.
Part Only the real-time parts are transposed.
Backing Module BK-7m

Other important functions

r
NOTE
If you choose to transpose the real-time parts, Music Style playback is also transposed.
1.
Press [KEY] button.
KEY
The display changes to:
The current “Key” setting (transposition interval) is displayed in the top line and already selected. The mode setting appears below it.
2.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the desired “Key” setting.
3.
Press the dial to confirm your setting.
“Key” setting
–6~0~+5 (semitone units)
If the “Key” setting differs from “0”, the [KEY] indica­tor lights.
NOTE
You can also change the key of audio signals received via the AUDIO INPUT jacks (see “Audio in Transpose” on p. 64).
4.
If you also need to change the “Mode” set­ting:
(a) Select it by rotating the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial,
then press the dial.
Song + Part Both song playback and the real-time
parts are transposed. Music Style playback is also transposed.

Changing the octave

This function allows you to transpose the real-time parts (UP1, UP2, LWR and MBS) up or down in octave steps.
1.
Press the [OCTAVE] button.
OCTAVE
The display changes to:
The display show the current octave setting for all four real-time parts.
2.
Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the “Octave” parameter of the real-time part whose setting you want to change.
3.
Press the dial, then rotate it to select the desired setting.
“Octave” setting
–4~0~+4
37
Page 38
Backing Module BK-7m
Other important functions

Using ‘Track Mute’ and ‘Center Cancel’

You can use this function to mute tracks of Music Styles or the melody part of the selected Standard MIDI File (SMF). After selecting a WAV or mp3 audio file, you can attenuate the vocal part at the center of the stereo image (“Center Cancel”). The Mute function’s behavior depends on the selected file type.
1.
Select a song (SMF or audio) or a Music Style.
2.
Press the [START/STOP] button to start play­back.
3.
Press the [TRACK MUTE] (CENTER CANCEL) button (its indicator lights).
MELODY
MUTE

Selecting the track(s) to mute for Music Styles or SMF songs

The following procedure allows you to specify the track of the selected Standard MIDI File that should be muted when you switch on the [TRACK MUTE] button.
NOTE
This function is not available for audio files.
1.
Select a Music Style or an SMF song.
2.
Press and hold the [TRACK MUTE] (CENTER CANCEL) button.
This function can also be selected using [MENU] but­ton ‰ “Performance Edit” ‰ “Style/SMF Track Mute”.
Depending on the song file type, the display changes to…
…or:
The “Track Mute” or “Center Cancel” function will turn on. This depends on the file type you selected:
File Type Function Explanation
Music Style
SMF Track Mute The specified Standard MIDI
Audio (mp3, wav)
NOTE
For some audio songs, the vocal sound may not be elimi­nated completely.
4.
Press the [TRACK MUTE] (CENTER CANCEL)
Track Mute The specified Music Style
track(s) is muted (Default: AC1~AC4).
file track is muted (Default: channel 4).
Center Cancel Sounds in the center (the
melodic portion of the sound) will be minimized.
button again to make its indicator go dark.
This switches the “Track Mute” or “Center Cancel” function back off.
When you start playback, you will notice that active parts are indicated by moving bar graphs that simu­late level meters. The bar graphs of muted parts do not move.
3.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to move the cursor to the track you want to mute.
The name of the Tone assigned to that track appears in the upper right corner.
4.
Press the dial to highlight the corresponding parameter.
5.
Rotate the dial to change the setting and press it to confirm you setting.
The possibilities are:
Display indication
<no indication> The associated track is played back.
M The associated track is no longer
played back (muted).
6.
If you want to save your selection of the track(s) that should be muted for any Music Style or SMF file you play back, see “Save Global” on p. 65.
r
38
Page 39
Backing Module BK-7m
LW2 MBS
+ Music Style control
UP1, UP2
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN

Using Split mode

r
When you start playback, you will notice that active parts are indicated by moving bar graphs that simu­late level meters. The bar graphs of muted parts do not move.
7.
If there is no need to save your settings, press and hold the [EXIT] button to return to the main page.
Using Split mode
In Split mode, the BK-7m transmits note messages below the split point to the MBS, LWR and NTA (Note­to-Arranger) parts. The note numbers above the split point, however, are transmitted to the UP2 and UP1 parts.
This only works if your external MIDI controller trans­mits all note messages on the same MIDI channel and if the BK-7m is set to receive on one MIDI channel only (see “‘Wizard Connection’ MIDI channel settings” on p. 26). Therefore, we suggest activating Split mode only if you use a digital piano or a single-zone MIDI master keyboard.
NOTE
In most cases, the default setting for the split point is note number 60 (C4). When you select a “DIGITAL PIANO” option (see p. 22), however, the split point is set to note number 54 (F#3). You can also change the split point to a different note (see “Split Point” on p. 59).
1.
Press the [SPLIT] button (its indicator lights).
the MBS and/or LWR parts (if they are active). Note numbers above the split point can be used to play melodies using the UP1 and/or UP2 part.
In Split mode, the “Type” parameter (see p. 60) is automatically set to “Intelligent”.
NOTE
See page 27 for how to select the real-time parts you want to use.
NOTE
You can activate a “Hold” function for the LWR part. See “Lower Hold” on p. 59.
2.
Press the [SPLIT] button again.
The BK-7m leaves Split mode and the [SPLIT] indica­tor goes dark and chord recognition (see “Type” on p. 60) is set to “Pianist”. This setting works as follows: the Arranger decodes every chord you play – no mat­ter where you play it. Causing the Arranger to play another chord requires that you play at least a triad (i.e. the three notes that make up a major or minor chord). You can play more than three chord notes but remember that two notes won’t cause the Arranger to change the key.
SPLIT
The BK-7m is now in Split mode: note numbers below the split point (see “Split” on p. 50) are used to trans­pose Music Styles playback in real-time and to play
39
Page 40
Backing Module BK-7m
Other important functions

Metronome

The BK-7m is equipped with a metronome that can be used in various situations. To use the metronome, here is what you need to do:
NOTE
While Music Style or SMF song playback is stopped, the [TAP TEMPO] button flashes in blue to indicate the selected tempo.
1.
Press and hold the [TAP TEMPO] button.
The display changes to:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Count In Off, 1bar, 2bar This parameter allows
you to switch the Count-In function on (“1 BAR” or “2 BAR”) or off. When on, the met­ronome will count in the specified number of measures (bars) before the Music Style or SMF song starts playing. (This setting is not available for audio songs.)
NOTE
You can also call up the “Metronome” page using [MENU] button ‰ “Global” ‰ “Metronome”.
2.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the “Metronome” field.
3.
Press the dial to highlight the setting.
4.
Rotate the dial to select “On”, then press the dial.
The metronome starts counting.
NOTE
The metronome is not available while an audio song file (mp3 or WAV) is selected.
The metronome parameters you can set are:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Metronome Off, On Select “On” to activate
the metronome.
Volume 0~127 Sets the metronome’s
level.
Time Signature 1~32/16, 8,
4, 2
Mode Always, Play Always: The metro-
Specifies the metro­nome’s time signature.
nome even counts when playback is stopped. Play: The metronome only sounds while the Music Style or song is playing.
r
40
Page 41
12. Performance Lists
Backing Module BK-7m

Performance Lists

r

Performance/Music Assistant Info

The “Performance List” is a list of up to 999 Performance memories. Each Performance memory contains a refer­ence to the desired Music Style or song and all settings you want to load along with that Music Style or song (see “‘Performance Edit’ parameters” on p. 50), including settings like INTRO/ENDING status, selected VARIATION, etc.
The Performance memories you create are saved to the selected “Performance List”. This allows you to prepare one set of Performance memories for weddings, another for corporate events, a third for anniversaries, etc. Per­formance Lists always reside on a USB memory.
It is perfectly possible to program several Performance memories for one song. Selecting a Performance mem­ory is a lot faster than calling up one of the BK-7m’s functions, modifying the settings, etc., while playing. You could program one Performance memory for the first part of a song, another for the bridge and a third one for the closing section. Doing so allows you to “play” with the effect settings of the various processors, for example.
NOTE
The BK-7m is supplied with one Performance List called “Music Assistant”. This list cannot be deleted or edited.
The display now shows all Performance Lists it found on the USB memory. (The internal “Music Assistant” list is always displayed in the top line.)
NOTE
If you already loaded a Performance List, the display imme­diately displays the Performance memories it contains. To load a different Performance List from the USB memory, press the PERFORMANCE [LIST] button again and proceed with step (4) below.
NOTE
If the USB memory contains no Performance List files, or if the memory is not connected (properly), the BK-7m only displays the “Music Assistant” list.
4.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the Performance List you want to use.
5.
Press the dial to confirm your selection.
(In our example, we selected the “Music Assistant” list.) The display changes to:

Loading a Performance/Music Assistant List

1.
Switch on the BK-7m.
See page 19.
2.
Connect an optional USB memory to the BK-7m.
This step is unnecessary if you want to use the “Music Assistant” list, because that list resides in the BK-7m’s internal memory.
3.
Press the PERFORMANCE [LIST] button.
PERFORMANCE
LIST
6.
If necessary, rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the “Load” option, then press the dial.
The display shows the Performance memories to which the selected list refers.
You can now select a Performance memory (see below).
If you need to load another Performance List, press the PERFORMANCE [LIST] button again.
41
Page 42
Backing Module BK-7m
Performance Lists

Recalling a Performance/Music Assistant memory

Here is how to select a Performance/Music Assistant memory from the last list you loaded (see p. 41).
1.
If the display doesn’t yet show a list of Per­formance/Music Assistant memories, press the PERFORMANCE [LIST] button.
In this example, we loaded the Music Assistant List.
2.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the memory whose settings you want to use, then press the dial to confirm your selec­tion.

Quickly locating Performance memories

The BK-7m provides a function that allows you to search the connected USB memory for Performance memory files whose names start with a given letter. This function is available even while the BK-7m is playing back a song or Music Style, allowing you to prepare the next Performance memory without keeping your audi­ence waiting.
1.
While a list of Performance memories is dis­played, press and hold the [PERFORMANCE [LIST] button.
PERFORMANCE
LIST
The button’s indicator flashes and the cursor indi­cates the first Performance memory whose name starts with the letter “A”.
The PERFORMANCE [LIST] button lights to signal that the BK-7m is now using the settings of the selected Performance memory. The name of that memory is highlighted.
The selected memory also refers to a Music Style or song, which can be started in the usual ways ([START/ STOP] button, [SYNC START], etc.).
During playback of that Style or song, you can already select a new Performance/Music Assistant memory.
3.
If you need to return to the main page, press the [EXIT] button.
To return to the page that lists the memories, press PERFORMANCE [LIST] again.
2.
Press the PERFORMANCE [LIST] button again to select the first Performance mem­ory name that starts with a “B”.
Repeat this operation for all subsequent letters (“C”, “D”, “E”, etc.) until you have selected the one you need.
3.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the memory whose settings you want to use, then press the dial to confirm your selec­tion.
r
42
4.
Press and hold the PERFORMANCE [LIST] button to leave this function.
Page 43

Saving your settings as a Performance

1.
Select a Music Style or song.
2.
Select all settings you would like to use for this Music Style or song.
You can, for instance, assign the desired Tones to the real-time parts, switch on the [INTRO] button, modify the “Performance Edit” settings, etc.
3.
Press the [WRITE] button to jump to the “Write Performance” page.
PERFORMANCE
WRITE
Backing Module BK-7m
Saving your settings as a Performance
7.
Press the [WRITE] button to save your set-
r
tings, thereby creating a new Performance memory.
This memory is added at the end of the currently selected Performance List (see “Loading a Perfor­mance/Music Assistant List” on p. 41).
NOTE
If you haven’t loaded any Performance List since switching on the BK-7m, a new Performance List is created, and your Performance memory becomes its first entry.

Other Performance List functions

1.
Connect a USB memory with at least one Performance List to the BK-7m.
The [WRITE] indicator flashes and the display changes to:
By default, the BK-7m assigns the name of the selected Music Style or song to the Performance set­tings you are about to save. If you agree with that name, proceed with step (7) below.
4.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the desired character, then press the dial.
5.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the next character position you want to change, then press the dial.
2.
Press the PERFORMANCE [LIST] button.
The display now shows all Performance Lists on the connected USB memory.
3.
Rotate the dial to select the desired Perfor­mance List, then press the dial to confirm your selection.
The display now changes to a page with the follow­ing options:
Function Explanation
Load Loads the selected Performance/Music
Assistant List.
Edit*
Rename* Allows you to rename the selected Perfor-
Allows you to edit the selected Perfor­mance List (“Delete”, “Move”).
mance List.
6.
Repeat steps (4) and (5) to enter the remaining characters.
NOTE
You can press the ONE TOUCH [1] button to delete the selected character. The [2] button allows you to insert a character.
Delete* Deletes the selected Performance List.
Make New Allows you to create a new (empty) Per-
formance List.
[*] Not available if you selected the Music Assistant List in step (3) above.
4.
Rotate the dial to select the desired option, then press the dial.
For a description of the “Load” option, see “Loading a Performance/Music Assistant List” on p. 41.
43
Page 44
Backing Module BK-7m
Performance Lists

If you select ‘Edit’

The display shows all Performance memories to which the selected List refers. The “Edit” option allows you to do the following:
Operation Explanation
Delete Deletes the selected Performance memory
from the active list.
Move Allows you to change the order in which
the Performance memories appear in the selected Performance List.
Save Allows you to save the edited list.
Delete operation
1.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the Performance memory you want to remove from the list.
2.
Press the dial to confirm your selection.
If you did not save the Performance List, the BK-7m now signals that you need to save it to preserve your changes.
9.
Rotate the dial to select “YES” to save your changes to the USB memory (or “NO” if you wish to keep the previous version).
10.
Press the dial to confirm your selection.
Move operation
1.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the Performance memory you want to move to a different position inside the list.
2.
Press the dial to confirm your selection.
3.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “Delete”, then press the dial.
The display changes to:
4.
Rotate the dial to select “YES” to delete the Performance memory (or “NO” if you wish to keep it).
5.
Press the dial to confirm your selection.
The display briefly confirms that the Performance memory has been deleted.
If you like, you can now select another Performance memory you want to delete, press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to confirm and repeat from step (3).
To save your edited Performance List, proceed with step (6). If you don’t want to save it, skip to step (8).
Saving the edited Performance List
6.
Press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial.
7.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “Save”, then press the dial again.
A message confirms that the data have been saved.
8.
Press the [EXIT] button to leave edit mode.
3.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “Move”, then press the dial.
The display changes to:
4.
Rotate the dial to move the selected Perfor­mance memory to the desired position, then press the dial.
You can now select another Performance memory you want to move, press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to confirm and repeat from step (4).
See “Saving the edited Performance List” if you want to save the edited list.

If you select ‘Rename’

The display changes to:
This page allows you to change the name of the selected Performance List.
r
44
Page 45
1.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the desired character, then press the dial.
You can press the ONE TOUCH [1] button to delete the selected character. The [2] button allows you to insert a character.
2.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the next character position you want to change, then press the dial.
3.
Repeat steps (1) and (2) above to complete the name.
4.
Press the [WRITE] button to save the Perfor­mance List under the new name.
The display briefly confirms the operation and the returns to the page with all Performance List files on your USB memory.
If the USB memory already contains a file of the name you have entered, the display asks you whether it is OK to overwrite the other Performance List file.
In that case, select “YES” to replace the other Perfor­mance List file with the one whose name you changed. (Select “NO” to return to the page where you can change the name.)
Backing Module BK-7m
1.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
Other Performance List functions
the desired character, then press the dial.
You can press the ONE TOUCH [1] button to delete the selected character. The [2] button allows you to insert a character.
2.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the next character position you want to change, then press the dial.
3.
Repeat steps (1) and (2) above to complete the name.
4.
Press the [WRITE] button to create the new Performance List, which is currently empty.
If the USB memory already contains a file of the name you have entered, the display asks you whether it is OK to overwrite the other Performance List file.
In that case, select “YES” to replace the other Perfor­mance List file with the one you want to create. (Select “NO” to return to the page where you can change the name.)
NOTE
The new Performance List file is saved to the “My Perfor­mances” folder on the USB memory. If this folder doesn’t yet exist, it will be created automatically.
r

If you select ‘Delete’

The display changes to:
This page allows you to delete the selected Perfor­mance List.
1.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “YES”, then press the dial to delete the Per­formance List.
Select “NO” if you do not want to delete the Perfor­mance List after all.
The display briefly confirms that the selected Perfor­mance List has been deleted and then returns to the page with all Performance List files on your USB memory.

If you select ‘Make New’

The display changes to:
This page allows you to create a new Performance List whose name is selected automatically by the BK-7m. If you are happy with that name, proceed with step (4) below. Otherwise…
45
Page 46
Backing Module BK-7m

Recording your performance as audio data

13. Recording your performance as audio data
Your BK-7m allows you to record everything it can transmit to its outputs, i.e. Music Style or song playback, your playing, your singing, and any audio signal transmitted to the BK-7m. (The metronome signal is not recorded.)
Feel free to connect the master outputs of an external mixing console to the BK-7m’s AUDIO INPUT sockets if you want to record your band or the signals of an accor­dion, additional synthesizers, pianos, drum machines, etc., as well.
The resulting audio file is stored in the WAV format (not mp3), which allows you to burn your recordings onto a CD using your computer.
NOTE
You will need a USB memory to record your performance.

Recording

NOTE
The following is based on the assumption that the “REC Audio Sync” parameter (page 64) is active.
1.
Connect the USB memory to which you wish to save the audio data.
NOTE
Use USB memory sold by Roland (M-UF-series). We cannot guarantee operation if any other USB memory is used.
2.
Prepare everything you want to record:
• Select the Music Style or song you want to use as accompaniment
• Set the levels and effects, etc.
3.
Set the desired balance between the Music Style/song and the real-time parts using the [BALANCE] knob.
You may also want to set the [AUDIO IN] knob.
4.
Press the [AUDIO REC] button (its indicator flashes).
5.
Press the [START/STOP] button.
The indicators of the [AUDIO REC] and [START/STOP] buttons light and the BK-7m starts playing back the selected Music Style or song and recording. Every­thing you play (on a connected instrument) is recorded.
6.
At the end of the song, press the [AUDIO REC] or [START/STOP] button to stop recording.
Music Style or song playback and recording stop. The following message appears:
You can now…
(a) Save the song under a new name.
‰ “Saving your recording as an audio file”
(b) Save the song under the name suggested by the
BK-7m (“My recording001”). ‰Press the [WRITE] button. After a few seconds, the display will return to the main page. In this case, your audio file is saved in the “My Record­ings” folder.
(c) Decide to discard your recording, because you are
unhappy with it. ‰ Press the [EXIT] button. The display changes to:
r
46
‰ Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “YES”, then press the dial to erase your recording.
Note: Selecting “NO” here takes you back to the state where you can choose between options (a) and (b).
Page 47
Backing Module BK-7m
r
Recording

Listening to your recording

If you selected (a) or (b) above, you can listen to your recorded performance:
1.
Press the [START/STOP] button to start play­back of your recording.
If your recording seems too loud or too soft, you may want to change the setting of the “REC Audio Level” parameter ([MENU] button ‰ “Global“‰ “Utility”‰ “REC Audio Level” on p. 64).
Note: The BK-7m provides a second recording mode that allows you to start recording before the song you selected ([MENU] button on p. 64
“Global“‰ “Utility”“REC Audio Sync”
).

Saving your recording as an audio file

When you stop recording (see above), the display shows the following message:
If the USB memory already contains a file of that name, you will be asked whether you want to over­write it:
In this case, select “YES” by first rotating the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and then pressing it to replace the old file with the new one (the old file will be lost).
Otherwise, select “NO” to return to the page where you can change the name, and enter a different name, the press the [WRITE] button.
When you press the [WRITE] button, your audio file is saved to the “My Recordings” folder on the USB memory.
NOTE
The name suggestion displayed here depends on the first recording. It will, however, be followed by an incremental number.
1.
If you want to name your new song, proceed with step (2).
If you are happy with the name suggested by the BK-7m, simply press the [WRITE] button (see step (5) below).
2.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select a different character, then press the dial to confirm your selection.
3.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the next character position you want to change, then press the dial.
You can also press the ONE TOUCH [1] button to delete the selected character, or the [2] button to insert a character.
4.
Repeat steps (2) and (3) to complete the name.
5.
Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator flashes) to save your recording under the new name and to return to the main page.
47
Page 48
Backing Module BK-7m

Cover functions for Music Styles and SMF songs

14. Cover functions for Music Styles and SMF songs
The Cover function allows you to change the orchestration of the selected Music Style or SMF song based on one of the 30 presets. The new version can be saved to a USB memory.
The display changes to:

Using Music Style or SMF Covers

Not available for audio files. The “SMF Cover” function provides “masks” that change the instrumentation of the selected Music Style or song. Simply by selecting another preset, you can cause a Viennese waltz to be played back by a heavy metal band, etc.
1.
Select the Music Style or SMF song you want to modify.
See “Selecting a song or Music Style on a USB mem­ory” on p. 35.
2.
Press the [START/STOP] button to start play­back of that Music Style or song.
5.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “Cover List”, then press the dial.
The display changes to…
This allows you to listen to the Music Style or song before you start editing it. If you selected a Music Style, remember to play a few chords on the external MIDI controller. See also “Playing back a song or Music Style from a USB memory” on p. 36.
3.
Press the [MENU] button.
MENU
The display changes to:
…or:
6.
Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select one of the 30 preset settings.
The names of the preset options already provide a good indication of what to expect.
After selecting a preset, you can return to the original orchestration (“Original”).
7.
Try out various presets to how (fast) this concept works.
Presets
Original, Live Band, Pop1, Dance, Acoustic1, Ethnic, Hard Rock, Pop2, Techno, Rock1, Oriental 1, A Cappella, Rock 2, House, Classic, Vocal Pop, Oriental 2, Vocal Rock, Acustic 2, Guitars, Jungle, Traditional, Celtic, Vocal Dance, Funky, Brass Band, Hip Pop, Vocal Ac., New Age, Vocal Or.
8.
If you like the new version better than the original one, you can save the Music Style or song to the USB memory with this informa­tion (see below).
NOTE
The “Cover” information is part of the data only the BK-7m understands. Other SMF players (or sequencer software) ignore these settings.
4.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “Cover (Style/SMF)“, the press the dial.
r
48
Page 49

Saving your modified Music Style or SMF song

1.
Select the desired “Cover” setting.
See “Using Music Style or SMF Covers” on p. 48.
2.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the pre­vious menu.
3.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select Save Cover, then press the dial.
The display shows the contents of the currently selected folder on the USB memory.
4.
If necessary, rotate and press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select a different location (another folder).
Backing Module BK-7m
Saving your modified Music Style or SMF song
If the USB memory already contains a Music Style or song file of that name, you will be asked whether you want to overwrite it:
In this case, select “YES” using the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to replace the old file with the new one (the old file will be lost).
Otherwise, select “NO” to return to the “Save” page and enter a different name.
r
5.
If necessary, press the [EXIT] button to return to a higher folder level.
6.
Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator flashes).
The display changes to:
The BK-7m automatically selects the name of the selected Music Style or song. If you agree to save the new version under that name, skip tp step (10).
7.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the desired character, then press the dial to edit it.
8.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the character position you want to change, then press the dial.
You can press the ONE TOUCH [1] button to delete the selected character. The [2] button allows you to insert a character.
9.
Repeat steps (7)~(8) to complete the name.
10.
Press the [WRITE] button to confirm your desire to save the Music Style or song.
The display briefly confirms the operation and then returns to the “Style Cover” page.
49
Page 50
Backing Module BK-7m

Menu options

15. Menu options
The BK-7m’s [MENU] button provides access to the available parameters and functions.

General procedure

1.
Press the [MENU] button (its indicator lights).
The display changes to:
2.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the desired function group.
The following function groups are available:
Function group Explanation
Performance Edit
Cover (Style/ SMF)
Global This function group contains parame-
MIDI This function group allows you to edit
Wizard Connection
Mastering Tools These functions allow you to set the
This function group allows you to select different Tones and effects set­tings for the real-time parts, the selected Music Style, to set the Arranger’s behavior, the split point, etc. All settings of this group can be saved to a Performance memory. See “‘Per­formance Edit’ parameters”.
Allows you to change the orchestration of the selected Music Style or song. See page 48.
ters that apply to all sections of the BK-7m (see p. 62).
the BK-7m’s MIDI parameters (see p. 66).
The BK-7m contains a connection wiz­ard that will help you configure the BK-7m for use with your MIDI control­ler. See “Wizard Connection” on p. 22 for details.
global compressor and equalizer (see p. 71).
Function group Explanation
Makeup Tools These functions allow you to edit the
selected Music Style or SMF song in an intuitive way, without caring too much about the underlying MIDI parameters. See page 75.
V-LINK V-LINK ( ) is a function that
allows music and images to be per­formed together using V-LINK-com­patible devices connected to one another via MIDI (see p. 82).
Factory Reset This command allows you to load the
BK-7m’s factory settings (see p. 83).
Format USB Device
3.
Press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to go to the
This command allows you to format an optional USB memory (see p. 83).
display page where you can edit the param­eters of the selected group, or to execute the selected command.

‘Performance Edit’ parameters

The following parameters can be set for each Perfor­mance memory:
Parameter/Group Explanation
Tone Part View This is where you can edit settings
related to Tones. See page 51.
Tone Part Effects Contains the effects parameters for the
real-time parts (MBS, LWR, UP2, UP1). See page 54.
Style Parts This group contains all parameters of the
Music Style parts. See page 59.
Split This parameter allows you to change the
split point, i.e. the separation between the lower and upper keyboard zones. See page 59.
Key Allows you to transpose the BK-7m in
semi-tone steps up or down. See page 37. This page can also be selected by press­ing the [KEY] button.
Arranger Setting This function group allows you to specify
where and how the selected Music Style should scan the incoming note messages for chord information. See page 60.
Melody Intelligent Allows you to set the “Melody Intelli-
gence” function. See page 61.
r
50
Page 51
Backing Module BK-7m
‘Performance Edit’ parameters
r
Parameter/Group Explanation
Save As Default This function allows you to save all “Per-
formance Edit” settings as the new defaults that will be loaded each time you switch on the BK-7m.

‘Tone Part View’ parameters

This function group can be selected using [MENU] but­ton ‰ “Performance Edit” ‰ “Tone Part View”.
1.
Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the real-time part you want to edit (MBS, LWR, UP2, UP1).
The display shows the settings for the selected real­time part.
2.
Use the dial to select and set the desired parameter(s).
The following parameters are available:
Families
Allows you to select a different Tone family. See page 91 for a list of available Tones and Drum Sets.
After selecting a new family, you can press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and then rotate it to select a Tone from that family.
Reverb Send
Use this parameter to set the reverb send level (i.e. the amount of effect that should be added).
Parameter Setting
Reverb Send 0~127
Chorus Send
Use this parameter to set the chorus send level (i.e. the amount of effect that should be added).
Parameter Setting
Chorus Send 0~127
Panpot
Use this parameter to change the stereo placement of the selected real-time part. “L63” means “hard left” and “R63” represents “hard right”. Choose “0” if the sound should be at the center of the stereo image.
Parameter Setting
Panpot L63~0~R63
EQ Part Edit
1.
If you also want to edit the parameters of equalizer, you have to press [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the “EQ Edit Part” page.
Parameter Explanation
Families The BK-7m’s Tones are grouped into 16
families: Piano, guitar, bass, strings, etc.
Tone
Allows you to select a different Tone within the active Tone family. See page 91 for a list of available Tones and Drum Sets.
While selecting a Tone, you can press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and then rotate it to select a different family.
Parameter Explanation
Tone The number of Tones depends on the
selected family.
Volume
Adjusts the volume of the selected real-time part. Selecting “0” means that the part is question is no longer audible.
Parameter Setting
Volume 0~127
2.
Use the dial to select and set the desired parameter(s).
The following parameters are available:
Parameter Setting range Explanation
Switch Off, On This parameter allows
you to switch the equalizer on and off.
High Freq 1500Hz, 2000Hz,
3000Hz, 4000Hz, 6000Hz, 8000Hz, 12000Hz
High Gain –15~+15dB Use this parameter to
Mid Freq 200~8000Hz Allows you to set the
Allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the high band (this is a shelving filter).
set the level of the selected “High” fre­quency. Positive val­ues boost (increase the volume of) that frequency band, neg­ative values cut (attenuate) it.
cutoff frequency of the middle band (this is a peaking filter).
51
Page 52
Backing Module BK-7m
Menu options
Parameter Setting range Explanation
Mid Gain –15~+15dB Use this parameter to
set the level of the selected “Mid” fre­quency.
Mid Q 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0,
8.0
Low Freq 90, 150, 180, 300,
360, 600Hz
Low Gain –15~+15dB Use this parameter to
3.
Press the [EXIT] button to leave the “EQ Part
Use this parameter to specify the width of the “Mid Frequency” band that you want to boost or cut. Smaller values mean that neighboring frequen­cies above/below that value are also affected.
Allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the low band (this is a shelving filter).
set the level of the selected “Low” fre­quency.
Edit” page.
Mfx
The BK-7m contains one multi-effect processor (“Mfx”) that can be used to process the desired real­tine part(s). Select “Off” for parts that don’t need to be processed by this Mfx.
Parameter Setting
Mfx Off, On
Expression Pedal
Select “Off” if you don’t need pedal expression for the selected part. This means that the real-time part in question no longer responds to an expression pedal you may have connected to the SWITCH/EXPRESSION socket.
Parameter Setting
Expression Pedal Off, On
Hold Pedal
This parameter allows you to specify whether and how a hold/damper pedal you connect to the SWITCH/EXPRESSION socket should respond to Hold messages (CC64).
Parameter Setting
Hold Pedal Auto, On, Off
“Auto” means that the part in question only responds to Hold messages if it is assigned to the right half (Split) or the entire keyboard.
“On” means that the part in question always responds to Hold messages, even if it is assigned to the left half of the keyboard.
“Off”, finally, means that the part does not respond to Hold messages.
Octave Shift
Allows you to transpose the selected real-time part in octave steps.
Parameter Setting
Octave Shift –4~0~+4
Coarse Tune
Changes the pitch of the selected real-time part semi-tone steps.
Parameter Setting
Coarse Tune –24~0~+24
Fine Tune
Changes the pitch of the selected part in steps of 1 cent (1/100 semi-tone).
Parameter Setting
Fine Tune –100~0~+100
Portamento Mode
You can to set the selected part to mono(phonic) mode. “Mono” means that you can only play one note at a time. You could select this mode to play a trumpet or woodwind part in a more natural way.
Poly”, on the other hand, means that you can play chords using the selected part.
Parameter Setting
Portamento Mode Poly, Mono
Portamento Time
“Portamento” means that the pitch doesn’t change in clearly defined steps: it produces glides from one note to the next. Use the this parameter to specify the speed at which those glides are carried out. The higher the value, the slower the transitions.
Parameter Setting
Portamento Time 0~127
After Touch
The BK-7m receives MIDI aftertouch messages. You can choose how you want the real-time parts to respond to these messages.
Parameter Setting
After Touch Off, Filter Up, Filter Down, Modula-
tion, Pitch Up, Pitch Down, Volume Up, Volume Dw
Off: The part in question does not respond to MIDI aftertouch messages.
r
52
Page 53
Backing Module BK-7m
‘Performance Edit’ parameters
r
Filter Up: The cutoff frequency of the Tone assigned to the selected part can be raised (so that the sound becomes brighter).
Filter Down: The cutoff frequency of the Tone assigned to the selected part can be lowered (so that the sound becomes mellower).
NOTE
Depending on the value you set for “Cut Off”, the “Filter Up” and “Down” parameters may have no audible effect. That is also the case of Tones whose cutoff frequency is already preset to the minimum value.
Modulation: Select this function if you want that an MIDI Aftertouch message control the modulation.
Pitch Up: Select this function if you want MIDI after­touch messages to move notes up to two semi-tones up.
Pitch Down: Select this function if you want MIDI aftertouch messages to move notes up to two semi­tones down.
Volume Up: This setting allows you to increase the volume of the selected part using MIDI aftertouch messages.
Volume Down: This setting allows you to decrease the volume of the selected part using MIDI after­touch messages.
Cut Off
This filter parameter allows you to make the selected sound darker or brighter. Positive settings mean that more overtones will be allowed to pass, so that the sound becomes brighter. The further this value is set in the negative direction, the fewer overtones will be allowed to pass and the sound will become softer (darker).
Setting
NOTE
For some sounds, positive (+) Cutoff settings will cause no noticeable change because the preprogrammed Cutoff parameter is already set to its maximum value.
Parameter Setting
Cut Off –64~+63
Characteristics of a low-pass filter
Frequency
Cutoff frequency
NOTE
For some sounds, negative (–) “Resonance” settings may produce no noticeable change because the Resonance is already set to the minimum value.
Parameter Setting
Resonance –64~+63
Attack (only for Tones)
This parameter adjusts the onset of the sound. Nega­tive values speed up the attack, so that the sound becomes more aggressive.
Parameter Setting
Attack –64~+63
Decay
This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound’s volume and cutoff frequency fall from the highest point of the attack down to the sustain level.
Parameter Setting
Decay –64~+63
NOTE
Percussive sounds usually have a sustain level of “0”. Piano and guitar sounds are in this category. Holding the keys for a long time will have little effect on the duration of the notes you are playing, even if you select a high value here.
Release
This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound will decay after the note is released until it is no longer heard. The cutoff frequency will also fall according to this setting.
Parameter Setting
Release –64~+63
Vibrato Rate
This parameter adjusts the speed of the pitch modu­lation. Positive (+) settings make the preset pitch modulation faster and negative (–) settings make it slower.
Parameter Setting
Vibrato Rate –64~+63
Vibrato Depth
This parameter adjusts the intensity of the pitch modulation. Positive (+) settings mean that the “wobble” becomes more prominent, while negative (–) settings make it shallower.
Resonance
When the Resonance value is increased, the over­tones in the area of the cutoff frequency will be emphasized, creating a sound with a strong charac­ter.
Parameter Setting
Vibrato Depth –64~+63
53
Page 54
Backing Module BK-7m
Menu options
Vibrato Delay
This parameter adjusts the time required for the vibrato effect to begin. Positive (+) settings increase the time before vibrato will begin and negative set­tings shorten the time.
Parameter Setting
Vibrato Delay –64~+63
C1
The function of this parameter depends on the sound you assigned to the selected part. It may influence the filter and Resonance setting, switch between the organ samples with the fast and slow Rotary modu­lation, etc.
Parameter Setting
C1 0~127
Key Range Lower, Key Range Upper
The “Key Range Lower” and “Key Range Upper” parameters allow you to set the note range to be received for the selected part.
Parameter Setting
Key Range Lower C1~G9
Key Range Upper C1~G9

‘Tone Part Effects’ parameters

This function group can be selected using [MENU] but­ton ‰ “Performance Edit” ‰ “Tone Part Effects”.
1.
Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select and set the desired effects processor (Mfx, Reverb, Chorus).
The display shows the settings for the selected real­time part.
The following parameters are available:
a) Mfx parameters
This function group can be selected using [MENU] button ‰ “Performance Edit” ‰ “Tone Part Effects” ‰ “Mfx”.
Your BK-7m contains a multi-effects processor that can be used for processing any real-time part you like. See “Mfx” on p. 52. (There are also 3 Mfx proces­sors for the Style/Song parts.)
Mfx Switch
Select “Off” if you don’t need the Mfx processor.
NOTE
The “Upper Range Lower” value cannot be higher than or equal to “Key Range Upper” (and vice versa).
Parameter Setting
Mfx Switch Off, On
r
54
Page 55
Backing Module BK-7m
‘Performance Edit’ parameters
r
Mfx Type
The BK-7m provides 84 different multi-effects types, some of which are combinations of two effects for added flexibility. This parameter allows you to select the desired type. The available types are:
1. Thru
2. Stereo EQ
3. Overdrive
4. Distortion
5. Phaser
6. Spectrum
7. Enhancer
8. Auto Wah
9. Rotary
10. Compressor
11. Limiter
12. Hexa-Chorus
13. Trem Chorus
14. Space-D
15. St. Chorus
16. St. Flanger
17. Step Flanger
18. St. Delay
19. Mod. Delay
20. 3 Tap Delay
21. 4 Tap Delay
22. Time Delay
23. 2 Pitch Shifter
24. FBK Pitch
25. Reverb
26. Gate Reverb
27. OD‰ Chorus
28. OD‰ Flanger
NOTE
29. OD‰ Delay
30. DST‰ Chorus
31. DST‰ Flanger
32. DST‰ Delay
33. EH‰ Chorus
34. EH‰ Flanger
35. EH‰ Delay
36. Chorus‰ DLY
37. Flanger‰ DLY
38. CHO‰ Flanger
39. CHO/DLY
40. Flanger/DLY
41. CHO/Flanger
42. Isolator
43. Low Boost
44. Super Filter
45. Step Filter
46. Humanizer
47. Speaker Sim
48. Step Phaser
49. MLT Phaser
50. Inf Phaser
51. Ring Modul
52. Step Ring
53. Tremolo
54. Auto Pan
55. Step Pan
56. Slicer
Some of the names shown above may be abbreviated in the display.
57. VK Rotary
58. 3D Chorus
59. 3D Flanger
60. 3D Step Flgr
61. Band Chorus
62. Band Flanger
63. Band Step Flg
64. VS Overdrive
65. VS Distortion
66. GT Amp Simul
67. Gate
68. Long Delay
69. Serial Delay
70. MLT Tap DLY
71. Reverse DLY
72. Shuffle DLY
73. 3D Delay
74. Long Time DLY
75. Tape Echo
76. LoFi Noise
77. LoFi Comp
78. LoFi Radio
79. Telephone
80. Phonograph
81. Step Pitch
82. Sympa Reso
83. Vib-Od-Rotary
84. Center Canc
Mfx Edit
If you also want to edit the parameters of the selected effect type, press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial on the “Mfx” page to jump to the “Mfx Edit” page. You can then use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to edit the available parameters.
See “MFX types and parameters” on p. 107 for the parameters that are available for the selected Mfx type.
The first two parameters for each Mfx type are “Cho- rus Send” (0~127) and “Reverb Send” (0~127). They allow you to specify whether—and to what extent—the Mfx signal should be processed by the Chorus and/or Reverb effect.
Reverb Type
This parameter allows you to select one of the twelve effects types, two of which are actually delay effects.
1. SRV Room
2. SRV Hall
3. SRV Plate
4. GM2 Reverb
5. Room1
6. Room2
7. Stage1
8. Stage2
9. Hall1
10. Hall2
11. Delay
12. Pan Delay
Reverb Edit
If you also want to edit the parameters of the selected effect type, press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to jump to the “Reverb Edit” page. You can then use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to edit the available param­eters.
Parameters for the “1. SRV Room”, “2. SRV Hall”, “3. SRV Plate” types:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Level 0~127 Output level of the
reverb signal.
Pre Delay 0.0~100.0 ms Adjusts the delay time
between the direct sound until the reverb sound is heard. This is used to simulate the distance between the original signal and the reflective surfaces.
Time 0~127 The duration of the
reverb signal. The higher the value, the “longer” the simulated room becomes.
Size 1~8 Determines how the
later reverberations are propagated, which gives the listener important clues about the height of the simu­lated room.
High Cut 160~12500Hz,
Bypass
Adjusts the frequency above which the high­frequency content of the reverb will be reduced. If you do not want to attenuate the high frequencies, set this parameter to BYPASS.
b) Reverb parameters
This function group can be selected using [MENU] button ‰ “Performance Edit” ‰ “Tone Part Effects” ‰ “Reverb”.
Reverb switch
Select “Off” you don’t need any reverb effect.
Parameter Setting
Reverb Switch Off, On
Density 0~127 Density (number) of
the reflections.
55
Page 56
Backing Module BK-7m
Menu options
Parameter Setting Explanation
Diffusion 0~127 Adjusts the change in
density of the reverb over time. The higher the value, the more the density increases with time. (The effect of this parameter is most noticeable with long reverb times.)
LF Damp Freq 50~4000Hz Adjusts the frequency
below which the low­frequency content of the reverb sound will be reduced.
LF Damp Gain –36~0dB Adjusts the amount of
damping applied to the frequency range selected with “LF Damp”. With a setting of “0”, there will be no reduction of the reverb’s low-fre­quency content.
HF Damp Freq 4000~
12500Hz
Adjusts the frequency above which the high­frequency content of the reverb sound will be reduced.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Time 0~127 Time length of rever-
beration.
Feedback 0~127 Adjusts the level of the
delay sound that is fed back into the effect when the “Character” setting is “Delay” or “Pan Delay”.
Parameters for the “5. Room1”~“12. Pan Delay” types:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Level 0~127 Output level of the
reverb signal.
Time 0~127 Time length of rever-
beration
HF Damp 200~8000Hz,
Bypass
Feedback 0~127 Adjusts the amount of
Adjusts the frequency above which the high­frequency content of the reverb sound will be cut. If you do not want to cut the high frequencies, set this parameter to BYPASS.
delay feedback.
HF Damp Gain -36~0dB Adjusts the amount of
damping applied to the frequency range selected with “HF Damp”. With a setting of “0”, there will be no reduction of the reverb’s high-fre­quency content.
Parameters for the “4. GM2Reverb” type:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Level 0~127 Main Output level of
the reverb signal.
Character Room1,
Room2, Room3, Hall1, Hall2, Plate, Delay, Pan Delay
Pre LPF 0~7 Cuts the high fre-
Level 0~127 Output level of the
Type of reverb
quency range of the sound coming into the reverb. Higher values will cut more of the high frequencies.
reverb signal.
c) Chorus parameters
This function group can be selected using [MENU] button ‰ “Performance Edit” ‰ “Tone Part Effects” ‰ “Chorus”.
Reverb switch
Select “Off” you don’t need any chorus effect.
Parameter Setting
Chorus Switch Off, On
Chorus Type
This parameter allows you to select one of the twelve effects types, one of which is actually a delay effect.
1. Chorus1
2. Chorus2
3. Chorus3
4. Flanger
5. GM2Chorus
6. Delay
Chorus Edit
If you also want to edit the parameters of the selected effect type, press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to jump to the “Chorus Edit” page. You can then use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to edit the available param­eters.
Parameters for the “1. Chorus1”~“4. Flanger” types:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Level 0~127 Output level of the
reverb signal.
r
56
Page 57
Backing Module BK-7m
‘Performance Edit’ parameters
r
Parameter Setting Explanation
Output Select Main, Rev,
Main+Rev
Filter Type OFF, LPF, HPF This allows you to
Cutoff Freq 200~8000Hz Basic frequency of the
Pre Delay 0.0~100.0 ms Adjusts the delay time
Allows you to specify where the processor’s output signal should go: to the OUTPUT (“Main”), the Reverb processor (“Rev”) or both (“Main+Rev”). The latter two options mean that the chorus signal is also pro­cessed by the reverb effect you select.
specify whether or not the incoming signal should be filtered before being pro­cessed by the chorus. This may be helpful to avoid a cluttered sound image or to pre­serve the “punch” of bass signals. Select “OFF” if you don’t need any filtering. “LPF” cuts the frequency range above the “Cutoff Freq”. “HPF” cuts the frequency range below the “Cutoff Freq”.
filter. This has no effect if you select “OFF” as filter type.
from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Rate Hz 0.05~10.00Hz Specifies the modula-
tion speed. This can be either a frequency (Hz) or a note value, depending on how you
Rate Note 1/64T, 1/64, 1/
32T, 1/32, 1/ 16T, 1/32., 1/ 16, 1/8T, 1/16., 1/8, 1/4T, 1/8., 1/4, 1/2 T, 1/4., 1/2, 1/1 T, 1/2., 1/1, 2/1 T, 1/1., 2/1
Depth 0~127 This parameter sets the
Phase 0~180 deg Spatial spread of the
Feedback 0~127 This parameter sets the
set the “Rate Sync” parameter above. “T” means “triplet” and a “.” refers to a dotted note. “2/1” means that each cycle takes two measures/bars. The advantage of working with a note value is that the chorus will undulate in sync with the current Arranger or Recorder tempo.
depth at which the chorus sound is modu­lated. Higher values result in a more pro­nounced modulation.
sound (i.e. the “stereo­ness” of the effect).
level at which the cho­rus sound is re-input (fed back) into the chorus. By using Feed­back, a denser Chorus sound can be created. Higher values result in a greater feedback level.
Rate Sync Hz, Note Use this parameter to
specify whether (“Note”) or not (“Hz”) the modulation rate should be synchro­nized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo. Depending on your choice, the setting range of the following parameter refers to a speed (Hz) or a note value.
Parameters for the “5. GM2Chorus” type:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Level 0~127 Main Output level of
the chorus signal.
Output Select Main, Rev,
Main+Rev
Allows you to specify where the processor’s output signal should go: to the OUTPUT (“Main”), the Reverb processor (“Rev”) or both (“Main+Rev”). The latter two options mean that the chorus signal is also processed by the reverb effect you select.
57
Page 58
Backing Module BK-7m
Menu options
Parameter Setting Explanation
Pre LPF 0~7 Cuts the high fre-
quency range of the sound coming into the chorus. Higher values will cut more of the high frequencies.
Level 0~127 Output level of the
chorus signal.
Feedback 0~127 Adjusts the amount of
the chorus sound that is fed back into the effect.
Delay 0~127 Adjusts the delay time
from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard.
Rate 0~127 This parameter sets the
speed (frequency) at which the chorus sound is modulated. Higher values result in faster modulation.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Output Select Main, Rev,
Main+Rev
L Delay Sync msec, Note Use this parameter to
Allows you to specify where the processor’s output signal should go: to the OUTPUT sockets (“Main”), the Reverb processor (“Rev”) or both (“Main+Rev”). The lat­ter two options mean that the chorus signal is also processed by the reverb effect you select.
specify whether (“Note”) or not (“msec”) the delay time should be synchronized to the tempo. Depending on your choice, the set­ting range of the fol­lowing parameter refers to a time (msec) or a note value.
Depth 0~127 This parameter sets the
depth at which the chorus sound is modu­lated. Higher values result in a more pro­nounced modulation.
Reverb Send 0~127 This parameter sets the
amount of chorus sound that is sent to the Reverb processor. The value “127” effec­tively allows you to connect the chorus and reverb effects in series (Chorus before Reverb). If you do not want the chorus signal to be processed by the Reverb effect, set this value to “0”.
Parameters for the “6. Delay” type:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Level 0~127 Output level of the
chorus signal.
L Delay msec 0~1000ms Specifies the delay
time. This can be either a time value (“msec”) or a note value, depending on how you set the “Delay Sync” parameter above. “T” means “triplet” and a
L Delay Note 1/64T, 1/64,
1/32T, 1/32, 1/16T, 1/32., 1/16, 1/8T, 1/16., 1/8, 1/4T, 1/8., 1/4, 1/2T, 1/4., 1/2, 1/1T, 1/2., 1/1, 2/1T, 1/1., 2/1
L Level 0~127 Volume of each delay
HF Damp 200~8000Hz,
Bypass
“.” refers to a dotted note. “2/1” means that each repetition comes after two measures/ bars. The advantage of working with a note value is that the delay effect always runs in sync with the current tempo.
line (there are three – left, center and right).
Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut. If you do not want to cut the high frequencies, set this parameter to BYPASS.
r
58
C Delay Sync See “L Delay Sync”
C Delay msec See “L Delay msec”
C Delay Note See “L Delay Note”
C Level See “L Level”
Page 59
Backing Module BK-7m
‘Performance Edit’ parameters
r
Parameter Setting Explanation
C Feedback –98~+98% Adjusts the proportion
of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect. Negative (–) settings invert the phase.
R Delay Sync See “L Delay Sync”
R Delay msec See “L Delay msec”
R Delay Note See “L Delay Note”
R Level See “L Level”

‘Style Parts’ parameters

This function group can be selected using [MENU] but­ton ‰ “Performance Edit” ‰ “Style Parts”.
The parameters of this function group apply to the eight Arranger parts (i.e. the parts used to play back the selected Music Style).
1.
Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the Music Style part you want to edit (ADrum, ABass, Acc1, Acc2, Acc3, Acc4, Acc4, Acc5, Acc6).
The display shows the settings for the selected part.
2.
Use the dial to select and set the desired parameter(s)
The following parameters are available:
Exp. Pedal
Select “Off” if you don’t need pedal expression for the selected part. This means that the Music Style part in question no longer responds to an expression pedal you may have connected to the SWITCH/EXPRESSION socket.
Parameter Setting
Exp. Pedal Off, On
Exp. Pedal All Parts On
If you are not sure which Music Style parts still receive expression messages, and if you want all to receive them, you can select this field and press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial.
Exp. Pedal All Parts Off
If you are not sure which Music Style parts still receive expression messages, and if no Music Style part should receive them, you can select this field and press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial.

Split

This page allows you to set two keyboard-related parameters. It can be selected using [MENU] button ‰ “Performance Edit” ‰ “Split”.
Split Point
The “Split Point” parameter allows you to set the split point.
Parameter Setting
Mute
Allows you to mute the selected part, so that it is no longer audible.
Parameter Setting
Mute Off, On
Solo
Allows you to solo the selected part, which means that all other Music Style parts are switched off.
Parameter Explanation
Solo Off, On
Volume
Adjusts the volume of the selected Music Style part. Selecting “0” means that the part is question is no longer audible.
Parameter Setting
Volume 0~127
Split Point B1~B6
Lower Hold
This parameter allows you to set the Hold function for the LWR part.
Parameter Setting
Lower Hold Off, On
If you set this parameter to “On”, the notes of the LWR part go on sounding until you play other notes in the left keyboard area. (This function is only avail­able while the [SPLIT] button lights.)
If you select “Off”, the LWR part stops sounding as soon as you release all keys in the left area.
Key
This function allows you to transpose the BK-7m’s pitch in semi-tone steps. Depending on the mode setting, this transposition applies to all sections or just a specific sec­tion. It can be selected using [MENU] button ‰ “Perfor­mance Edit” ‰ “Key” or by pressing the [KEY] button. See “Changing the key” on p. 37.
59
Page 60
Backing Module BK-7m
Menu options

‘Arranger Setting’ parameters

This function group can be selected using [MENU] but­ton ‰ “Performance Edit” ‰ “Arranger Setting”.
The parameters of this function group apply to the Arranger as a whole and allow you to fine-tune its behavior.
Arranger
Select “Off” if you only need the drum part of the selected Music Style and no melodic accompaniment parts (ABass, ACC1~6).
Parameter Setting
Arranger Off, On
Type
This parameter allows you to specify how the chords received by the NTA parts are interpreted.
Parameter Setting
Type Standard, Pianist, Accordionist1,
Accordionist2, Guitarist, Intelligent, Easy
Seventh chords Fundamental + any white key to the
left of the fundamental.
Minor seventh chords
Fundamental + any black key to the left + any white key to the left.
Arranger Hold
Select “Off” if you want the accompaniment to stop as soon as the notes received by the NTA parts are released. This parameter is switched “On” by default.
Parameter Setting
Arranger Hold Off, On
Tempo
Each Music Style has a preset tempo that is recalled when a Style is selected. This parameter allows you to specify if and when the BK-7m should ignore the preset tempo and go on using the tempo of the pre­viously selected Music Style.
Parameter Setting
Tempo Preset, Auto, Lock
Here is what these three options mean:
Setting
Preset The Style's preset tempo is loaded.
Selecting a new Music Style
Playback is stopped Playback is running
NOTE
If the “Arr Type” parameter (page 63) is set to “On”, this “Type” setting has no effect.
Standard: This is the normal chord recognition mode.
Pianist: In this mode, the BK-7m only recognizes chords that consist of at least three notes. Playing only two notes will not cause the Music Style’s key to change.
Guitarist: Select this setting if you are using a MIDI guitar to control the BK-7m’s Arranger.
Intelligent: Select “Intelligent” when you want the chord recognition to supply the missing notes of the chords you play.
Accordionist1: Select this setting if you are using an FR-x-series or MIDI-compatible accordion to control the BK-7m’s Arranger.
Accordionist2: Select this setting if you are using a MIDI-compatible accordion that transmits its chord information within a single octave and “dim” chords without the root note.
Easy: This is another “intelligent” chord fingering sys­tem. It works as follows:
Auto The BK-7m loads the
preset tempo of the new Music Style
Lock The BK-7m doesn’t
load the preset tempo of the new Music Style. It is played at the cur­rent tempo.
The BK-7m doesn’t load the preset tempo of the new Music Style. The new Music Style is played at the current tempo.
Fill In Half Bar
When this parameter is “On” the length of the Fill-Ins, which are played when the [AUTO FILL IN] button lights, is halved.
Parameter Setting
Fill In Half Bar Off, On
Major chords Press the key that corresponds to the
Minor chords Fundamental + any black key to the
r
60
chord’s fundamental.
left of the fundamental.
Page 61
Backing Module BK-7m
‘Performance Edit’ parameters
r

‘Melody Intelligent’ parameters

This function group can be selected using [MENU] but­ton ‰ “Performance Edit” ‰ “Melody Intelligent”.
The following parameters are available:
Switch
Select “On” if you want add a MELODY INTELL part. This part is triggered by the chord recognition of the NTA parts and plays automatic harmonies that are added to the melody that you are playing using the on UP1 part. You can choose from among 18 har­mony types (see below).
Parameter Setting
Switch Off, On
NOTE
Do not forget to switch on the UP1 part (page 27).
Type
Allows you to select one of the 18 harmony types:

Save As Default

This function allows you to save the current “Perfor­mance Edit” settings as default settings. These set­tings are loaded each time you switch on the BK-7m.
1.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “YES”, then press the dial to define the cur­rent settings as the default state.
The display shows a confirmation message. If you don’t want to define the current settings as
the default state, rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “NO”, then press the dial. The BK-7m then returns to the “Performance Edit” page.
Parameter Setting
Type 1:Duet, 2:Organ 3:Combo, 4:Strings,
5:Choir, 6:Block, 7:Big Band, 8:Country, 9:Traditional, 10:Brodway, 11:Gospel, 12:Romance, 13:Latin, 14:Country Guitar, 15:Country Ballad, 16:Waltz Organ, 17:Octave Type1, 18:Octave Type2
Intell Threshold
This value represents the lowest velocity value (between “1” and “127”) of the UP1 part that triggers the “Melody Intelligent” part. If you don’t need this switching function, select “0”.
Parameter Setting
Intell Threshold 0~127
Level
Allows you to set the level of the Melody Intelligence part to ensure that the harmonies blend in with the rest.
Parameter Setting
Level 0~127
61
Page 62
Backing Module BK-7m
Menu options

‘Global’ parameters

The settings of the “Global” parameters can be saved to the BK-7m’s global memory. If you don’t save them, your changes are lost when you switch off the BK-7m.
See “Save Global” on p. 65 for how to save these set­tings.

Scale Tune

This parameter can be selected using [MENU] button ‰ “Global” ‰ “Scale Tune”.

Display Brightness

This parameter can be selected using [MENU] button ‰ “Global” ‰ “Display Brightness”.
It is used to change the brightness of the BK-7m’s display in case you find it difficult to read.
Parameter Setting
Display Brightness 0~35

Tuning

This parameter can be selected using [MENU] button ‰ “Global” ‰ “Tuning”.
This parameter allows you to tune your BK-7m to acoustic instruments that cannot be tuned. The default is 440.0Hz.
This parameter allows you to change the tuning of all notes of one octave, which may come in handy to create oriental tunings.
Parameter Value Explanation
C~B (each note can be set individu­ally)

One Touch Hold

This parameter can be selected using [MENU] button ‰ “Global” ‰ “One Touch Hold”.
-64~0~+63 Changes the pitch of the notes C~B in steps of 1 cent. The value that you specify is applied to all notes of the same name. If you change the tuning of the “C”, that value is added to, or subtracted from, all Cs (C1, C2, C3, etc.). (“–50” means that the note in question is tuned a quarter tone down.)
Parameter Setting
Tuning 415.3~466.2Hz

Style/SMF TrackMute

See “Using ‘Track Mute’ and ‘Center Cancel’” on p. 38.

Scale Tune Switch

This parameter can be selected using [MENU] button ‰ “Global” ‰ “Scale Tune Switch”.
Parameter Value Explanation
Part Off, On Select “On” if the “Scale
Tune” settings (see below) should apply to the real­time parts.
Style Off, On Select “On” if the “Scale
Tune” settings (see below) should apply to the Music Style parts.
The parameters on this page allow you to filter cer­tain One Touch settings. Select “On” for the settings you do not want to load along with the remaining One Touch settings when you press a ONE TOUCH button.
Parameter Setting
Tempo Off, On
Tone Part Off, On
Intro/Ending Off, On
Variation Off, On
Expression Pedal Off, On

Performance Hold

This page can be selected using [MENU] button ‰ “Global” ‰ “Performance Hold”.
r
62
Page 63
Backing Module BK-7m
‘Global’ parameters
r
The parameters on this page allow you to filter cer­tain Performance settings. Select “On” for the set­tings you do not want to load along with the remain­ing settings when you select a Performance memory.
Parameter Setting
Tempo Off, On
Expression Pedal Off, On
Tone Off, On
Tone Part Off, On
Split Off, On
Lower Octave Off, On
Arr Type Off, On
Transpose Off, On
Bass Inversion Off, On

Metronome

These parameters can be selected using [MENU] but­ton‰ “Global” ‰ “Metronome”. See “Metronome” on p. 40.

Lyrics Settings

This page can be selected using [MENU] button ‰ “Global” ‰ “Settings”.
The following table shows the Video Settings param­eters.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Background Mode
Background Colour
Highlight Colour
Colour, Logo [Colour]: The back-
ground is empty but uses the selected color (see below). [Logo]: The BK-7m’s logo is shown as back­ground
1~8 Choose the back-
ground color.
1~8 Choose the highlight
color.

Video Settings

These parameters can be selected using [MENU] but­ton‰ “Global” ‰ “Video Settings”.
The following table shows the Video Setting parame­ters.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Video Mode PAL, NTSC Select the setting that
corresponds to the for­mat used by the con­nected screen.
Aspect Ratio Full, Center Specify the appropri-
ate aspect ratio for the screen you are using.
Row Displaying 2, 4 Allows you to specify
the number of lines to be used for displaying lyrics.
Chord View Off, On Select “On” of the
BK-7m should display chord symbols along with the lyrics.

Utility

The “Utility” parameters are found on the display page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰ “Global” ‰ “Utility”.
NOTE
If you work with a TV set, do not forget to select the correct channel (“AV” or something to that effect, see the manual that came with your set).
63
Page 64
Backing Module BK-7m
Menu options
The following table shows the utility parameters.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Song Quick Start
Perform Next Song
REC Audio Level
Off, 2nd bar, 1st note
Off, On At the end of the cur-
–24, –18, –12, –6, +0 dB
Off: Playback starts at the very beginning of the song file (which may contain a few silent bars). 2nd bar: Causes play­back to start from measure 2 of the selected Standard MIDI File. 1st note: This is basi­cally the same as the above, except that playback starts on the first note of the selected song.
rent song, the next song in the Perfor­mance List starts auto­matically. If the Performance List step refers to a Music Style, the Style in question is loaded, but you will need to start manually by pressing the [START/ STOP] button.
Allows you to set the recording level for your own perfor­mances (see p. 46). The setting of the [VOL­UME] knob does not affect the recording level. (Default setting: +0dB)
Parameter Setting Explanation
USB Driver Generic,
Original
Audio In Center Canc
Audio in Transpose
Auto Power Off Off, 240 min This parameter allows
Version Info n.nn Shows the version
Off, On Select “On” if the “Cen-
Off, On Select “On” if the
Generic: Choose this if you want to use the standard USB driver that was included with your computer. Nor­mally, you should use this mode. Original: Choose this if you want to use a USB driver down­loaded from the Roland website (www.roland.com).
ter Cancel” function (see p. 38) should also affect the signals received via the AUDIO INPUT sockets.
transposition setting should also affect the signals received via the AUDIO INPUT sockets.
you to cause the BK-7m to switch itself off after 240 minutes if you are not using it. The default setting is “Off”, meaning that the BK-7m remains on until you press the [POWER] switch again.
number of the BK-7m’s operating system.
REC Audio Sync Off, On Off: Choose this set-
r
64
ting when you want to start recording before starting Music Style or song playback. On: Choose this set­ting when you want to be able to start record­ing simultaneously with Music Style song playback. When you choose this setting, pressing the [AUDIO REC] button will stop both playback and the recorder.

Pedal

The “Footswitch” setting is found on the display page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰ “Global” ‰ “Pedal”.
If you do not change the factory setting, the foot­switch is assigned to the Start/Stop function.
The following table shows the functions you can assign to the footswitch.
Function Explanation
Start/Stop Starts and stops Music Style or song
playback. Same function as the [START/STOP] button.
Page 65
Backing Module BK-7m
‘Global’ parameters
r
Function Explanation
Intro Ending Variation1 Variation2 Variation3 Variation4 Bass Inversion
Arranger Hold Allows you to switch the Arranger
Arranger Chord Off
Perf. Next Perf. Prev
Portamento Switches the Portamento function
Hold Soft Sostenuto
Track Mute Same function as the [TRACK MUTE]
Same functions as the [INTRO], [ENDING], [VARIATION1], [VARIATION2], [VARIATION3], [VARIATION4], [BASS INV], buttons. See “Using Music Styles” on p. 30.
Hold function on and off. See page 60.
Allows you to switch the Arranger’s chord recognition off, in which case only the drum/percussion playing.
Allows you to select the next or pre­vious Performance.
on and off. See page 52.
The assigned footswitch can be used as a Soft, Sostenuto or Sustain (Hold pedal).
button.
Function Explanation
ChordRecOff While you are holding down the
footswitch, the BK-7m does not scan the incoming note messages for chord information. Those messages are therefore only transmitted to the active real-time parts (UP1, UP2, LWR, MBS). Release the footswitch to once again activate chord recog­nition.
Pedal Controller FC-7
This setting is found on the display page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰ “Global” ‰ “Pedal Controller FC-7”.
The following table shows the functions you can assign to each of the FC-7’s footswitches.
FC-7 Switch Function
1
Break Mute When you press the footswitch,
Music Style playback is muted for the remainder of the current mea­sure.
Reset/Start This function allows you to have the
BK-7m start on the first beat of the currently selected Music Style pat­tern when you press the assigned footswitch. Use it when you are accompanying a singer or soloist whose timing is a little shaky and suddenly notice that the playback lags one or two beats behind the singer/soloist.
AudioXfade The footswitch can be used to acti-
vate a crossfade between two files. To make this work, select a different song while the current song is being played back and press the foot­switch. The BK-7m creates a brief blend between the current and the next song. (This function is only available between two audio songs.)
Fade Out This function gradually decreases
the volume until reaches zero. At that time, song or Style playback stops automatically.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Start/Stop, Intro, Ending, Variation1, Variation2, Variation3, Variation4, Bass Inversion, Arranger Hold, Arranger Chord off, Perf. Next, Perf. Prev, Portamento, Hold, Soft, Sostenuto, Track Mute, Break mute, Reset/Start, AudioXfade, Fade Out, ChordRecOff
See “Pedal” on p. 64 for an explanation of the avail­able options.

Save Global

This function allows you to save all “Global” parameter settings to ensure that they are loaded automatically each time you switch the BK-7m on.
You can select this function using [MENU] button ‰ “Global” ‰ “Save Global”.
1.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “YES”, then press the dial to define the cur­rent settings as the default state.
The display shows a confirmation message. If you don’t want to define the current “Global” set-
tings as the default state, rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “NO”, then press the dial. The BK-7m then returns to the “Performance Edit” page.
65
Page 66
Backing Module BK-7m
Menu options

MIDI parameters

This section discusses the BK-7m’s MIDI parameters and the associated memories called “MIDI Sets”.
What’s MIDI
“MIDI” stands for “Musical Instrument Digital Inter­face.” It is a universal standard that allows perfor­mance data to be exchanged among electronic musi­cal instruments and computers. The BK-7m provides a MIDI IN and MIDI OUT socket so that performance data can be received from other MIDI instruments. It is also equipped with a COMPUTER port (USB) that can receive and transmit MIDI data from a computer.
The MIDI parameters can be selected using [MENU] button ‰ “MIDI”.
1.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the “MIDI Set” field.
2.
Press the dial to edit the “MIDI Set” field.
The “MIDI Set” field is now displayed in reverse.
3.
Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the MIDi Set “User1~8” you want to load, then press the dial to confirm your selection.
The BK-7m loads the selected MIDI Set.

Edit Style Parts

The following parameters are located on the display page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰ “MIDI” ‰ “Edit Style Parts”.
The BK-7m’s MIDI environment contains the follow­ing options:
MIDI parameter group
MIDI Set Allows you to load a MIDI Set
Edit Style Parts Here, you can edit all MIDI parame-
Edit Song Parts Here, you can edit all MIDI parame-
Edit Tone Parts Here, you can edit all MIDI parame-
Edit System This groups contains all MIDI param-
Save MIDI Set This function allows you to save your
NOTE
We recommend using the wizard to quickly set up the BK-7m for new MIDI controllers you may want to use. See
“Wizard Connection” on p. 22.
Explanation
“User1~8”. See below.
ters of the Music Style parts. See below.
ters of the Song parts. See page 67.
ters related to the real-time parts (UP1, UP2, LWR MBS). See page 68.
eters that apply to the BK-7m as a whole. See page 68.
changes to a “User” memory for quick recall. “Save MIDI Set” on p. 71.
NOTE
We recommend using the wizard to quickly set up the BK-7m for new MIDI controllers you may want to use. See “Wizard Connection” on p. 22. Only then should you change the settings that are not suitable for your applica­tion.
1.
Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the part you want to edit (ADrum, ABass, Acc1, Acc2, Acc3, Acc4, Acc5, Acc6).
The display now shows the settings for the selected part.
Tx
Select “On” if you want the selected part to transmit MIDI data.
Parameter Setting
Tx Off, On
Tx Ch
Allows you to assign a MIDI transmit channel to the selected part.
Parameter Setting
Tx Ch 1~16

Loading a MIDI Set

The BK-7m allows you to store and recall 8 different MIDI configurations.
NOTE
Loading a MIDI Set only changes the MIDI settings and has no effect on the remaining parameters that are also affected by the “Wizard Connection” function (see p. 87).
r
66
Tx Shift
This parameter allows you to transpose the note messages before they are transmitted to an external MIDI instrument or computer. The maximum possible transposition is four octaves up (+48) or down (–48). Each step represents a semi-tone.
Parameter Setting
Tx Shift –48~0~+48
Page 67
Backing Module BK-7m
MIDI parameters
r
Tx Local
This is where you can disconnect the part from the internal sound source (“Off”) – or re-establish that connection (“On”).
Parameter Setting
Tx Local Off, On
Tx Event
The “TX Event” section provides a number of filters that allow you to specify whether the messages in question should be transmitted (Off) or not (On).
Filter Setting Explanation
Program Change
Pitch Bender Off, On Select “On” to filter Pitch
Modulation Off, On Select “On” to filter Modu-
Volume Off, On Select “On” to filter Volume
Panpot Off, On Select “On” to filter Panpot
Off, On Select “On” to filter pro-
gram change and bank select (CC00, CC32) mes­sages.
Bend messages.
lation messages (CC01).
messages (CC07).
messages (CC10).
1.
Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the part you want to edit (Part 1~16).
The display now shows the settings for the selected part.
Rx
Select “On” if you want the selected part to receive MIDI data.
Parameter Setting
Rx Off, On
Rx Ch
Allows you to assign a MIDI receive channel to the selected part.
Parameter Setting
Rx Ch 1~16
Rx Shift
This parameter allows you to transpose the note messages received from an external MIDI instrument or computer. The maximum possible transposition is four octaves up (+48) or down (–48). Each step repre­sents a semi-tone.
Parameter Setting
Rx Shift –48~0~+48
Expression Off, On Select “On” to filter Expres-
sion messages (CC11).
Reverb Off, On Select “On” to filter Reverb
messages (CC91).
Chorus Off, On Select “On” to filter Chorus
messages (CC93).
Select All Off, On Select “On” to filter all MIDI
message listed above.
NOTE
We recommend using the wizard to quickly set up the BK-7m for new MIDI controllers you may want to use. See
“Wizard Connection” on p. 22.

Edit Song Parts

The following parameters are located on the display page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰ “MIDI” ‰ “Edit Song Parts”.
Rx Event
The “Rx Event” section provides a number of filters that allow you to specify whether the messages in question should be received (Off) or not (On).
Filter Setting Explanation
Program Change
Pitch Bender Off, On Select “On” to filter Pitch
Modulation Off, On Select “On” to filter Modu-
Volume Off, On Select “On” to filter Volume
Panpot Off, On Select “On” to filter Panpot
Expression Off, On Select “On” to filter Expres-
Reverb Off, On Select “On” to filter Reverb
Off, On Select “On” to filter pro-
gram change and bank select (CC00, CC32) mes­sages.
Bend messages.
lation messages (CC01).
messages (CC07).
messages (CC10).
sion messages (CC11).
messages (CC91).
NOTE
We recommend using the wizard to quickly set up the BK-7m for new MIDI controllers you may want to use. See “Wizard Connection” on p. 22. Only then should you change the settings that are not suitable for your applica­tion.
Chorus Off, On Select “On” to filter Chorus
messages (CC93).
Hold Off, On Select “On” to filter Hold
messages (CC64).
Sostenuto Off, On Select “On” to filter Soste-
nuto messages (CC66).
67
Page 68
Backing Module BK-7m
Menu options
Filter Setting Explanation
Soft Off, On Select “On” to filter Soft
messages (CC67).
Caf Off, On Select “On” to filter Caf-
Channel aftertouch.
RPN Off, On Select “On” to filter Regis-
tered parameter number messages (CC100/101).
NRPN Off, On Select “On” to filter Non-
registered parameter num­ber messages (CC98/99).
System Exclusive
CC16 Off, On General purpose controller
Select All Off, On Select “On” to filter all MIDI
Off, On Select “On” to filter System
Exclusive messages.
that allows you to influence the “C1” parameter (see p. 54).
message listed above.
Tx, Tx Ch, Tx Shift, Tx Local, Tx Event
For the explanation of these parameters please refer to “Rx Event” on p. 67.

Edit Tone Parts

The following parameters are located on the display page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰ “MIDI” ‰ “Edit Tone Parts”.
NOTE
We recommend using the wizard to quickly set up the BK-7m for new MIDI controllers you may want to use. See “Wizard Connection” on p. 22. Only then should you change the settings that are not suitable for your applica­tion.
1.
Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the part you want to edit (MBS, LWR, UP2, UP1).
The display now shows the settings for the selected part.

Edit System

The following parameters are located on the display page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰ “MIDI” ‰ “Edit System”.
The “Edit System” group contains the following parameters:
Edit System Explanation
Sync These parameters are used to synchronize
external MIDI devices. See below.
Basic The parameters of this group affect the
BK-7m’s Basic channel. The Basic channel is used to receive and transmit Program Change and Bank Select messages for selecting Performances as well as for the reception and transmission of other kinds of messages that are not directly related to a specific MIDI channel. See page 69.
Style The parameters of this group affect the
BK-7m’s Style channel. The Style channel is used for receiving program change and bank select messages that select Styles and volume messages that change the Style’s volume. See page 70.
NTA These parameters allow you to assign MIDI
channels to the BK-7m’s NTA parts (Note­to-Arranger). Only notes received on one of these channels are considered chord information that can be used to transpose Music Style playback in real-time. See page 70.
Parameters This group contains MIDI parameters that
are not related to the previous groups. See page 71.

Sync

The following parameters are located on the display page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰ “MIDI” ‰ “Edit System” ‰ “Sync”.
Rx, Rx Ch, Rx Shift, Rx Event
For the explanation of these parameters please refer to “Edit Song Parts” on p. 67.
r
68
Page 69
Backing Module BK-7m
MIDI parameters
r
The “Sync” parameters allow you to specify whether or not the BK-7m should send MIDI real-time mes­sages when you start Style or song playback. This allows you to synchronize external instruments or (software) sequencers with your BK-7m.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Sync Rx Off, On This parameter is used
to specify whether Music Style and song playback should be synchronized by an external MIDI device.
Mode Internal, Auto,
MIDI, Remote
Stl Start/Stop TxOff, On If you activate this
Stl Clock Tx Off, On If you activate this
Internal: Song or Style playback uses BK-7m internal tempo. Auto: A good setting for remote control of song or Style playback (using a PK-5A dynamic MIDI pedal board, for example). If the BK-7m receives a MIDI Start message (FA), it waits for Clock messages that specify the tempo. If those Clock messages are not received, the BK-7m starts playback using its internal tempo. If, however, Clock mes­sages (F8) follow after the Start message, the BK-7m uses the exter­nal tempo. MIDI: Song or Style playback can be started or stopped with MIDI real-time messages (Start, Stop, Clock) received from an external clock source. Remote: Song or Style playback waits for a start message to start playback at its own tempo. When it receives a stop mes­sage, playback stops. External clock mes­sages are ignored.
option, the BK-7m sends start or stop messages when you start (or stop) Style playback.
option the Style play­back sends MIDI Clock messages.
Parameter Setting Explanation
SMF Start/Stop TxOff, On Similar to “Stl Start/
Stop Tx” but for songs.
SMF Clock Tx Off, On Similar to “Stl Clock Tx”
but for songs.
SMF Pos Point TxOff, On If you switch this
parameter on, the song playback sends Song Position Pointer (SPP) messages that indi­cate the current play­back position.

Basic

The following parameters are located on the display page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰ “MIDI” ‰ “Edit System” ‰ “Basic”.
The Basic channel is used to receive and transmit Program Change and Bank Select messages for selecting Performances, as well as for the reception and transmission of other kinds of messages that are not directly related to a specific MIDI channel.
NOTE
If you select another channel, messages intended for the Basic parameters might also cause other parameters to change when you don’t want them to.
The following parameters are available here:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Rx Off, On Switches the recep-
tion of MIDI messages on the Basic channel on or off.
Rx Channel 1~16 Use this parameter to
assign a MIDI transmit channel to the “Basic” channel.
Performance PC Rx
Master Volume RxOff, On Allows you to enable
Off, On This parameter is used
to enable or disable the reception of program change and bank select messages related to Performance selection.
or disable the recep­tion of Master Volume messages that would change the BK-7m’s overall volume. This is an exclusive message common to all newer MIDI devices.
69
Page 70
Backing Module BK-7m
Menu options
Parameter Setting Explanation
Tx Off, On Switches the transmis-
sion of MIDI messages on the Basic channel on or off.
Tx Channel 1~16 The channel used to
transmit MIDI mes­sages.
Performance PC Tx
Off, On This parameter is used
to enable or disable the transmission of pro­gram change and bank select messages related to Performance selec­tion

Style

The following parameters are located on the display page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰ “MIDI” ‰ “Edit System” ‰ “Style”.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Style Volume RxOff, On Allows you to enable
or disable the recep­tion of volume mes­sages relating the Style.
Style Pc Rx Off, On This parameter allows
you to enable or dis­able the reception of program change and bank select messages for Style selection.
Tx Off, On Switches the transmis-
sion of MIDI messages on the Style channel on or off.
Tx Channel 1~16 The channel used to
transmit MIDI mes­sages.
NTA
The following parameters are located on the display page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰ “MIDI” ‰ “Edit System” ‰ “NTA”.
The Style channel is used for receiving program change and bank select messages that select Styles and volume messages that change the Style’s vol­ume.
The MIDI address of a Music Style consists of three elements: a CC00 number, a CC32 number and a pro­gram change number. The values assigned to CC00 and CC32 define the Style (see “Music Style list” on p. 88), whereas the program change number defines the Division (Intro, Ending, etc.). See “Style division program change numbers” on p. 90.
Sending only a program change number selects another Division of the currently active Style. Be aware, however, that only sending CC00 and CC32 messages (without a program change) has no effect.
NOTE
When you select another Style on your BK-7m, it transmits a CC00-CC32-PC cluster on the Style channel, which you could record using an external sequencer.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Rx Off, On Switches the recep-
tion of MIDI messages on the Style channel on or off.
These parameters allow you to specify on which MIDI channels the BK-7m should receive chord informa­tion used to change the Music Style’s key in real-time (the notes in question are called “Note-to-Arranger”, or “NTA” for short).
Parameter Setting Explanation
Channel Ch1~Ch16 MIDI channel
Rx Off, On This parameters allows
you to specify whether (“On”) or not (“Off”) the selected MIDI channel should be used to receive chord informa­tion.
Rx Octave –4~0~ 4 Use this parameter to
transpose the notes received on the selected MIDI channel (“Ch”) in steps of one octave.
Rx Channel 1~16 Use this parameter to
r
70
assign a MIDI receive channel to the Style section.
Page 71
Backing Module BK-7m
r

Mastering Tools

Parameters

The following parameters are located on the display page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰ “MIDI” ‰ “Edit System” ‰ “Parameters”.
This page contains several parameters that are not related to one another (the other MIDI pages always concentrate on one aspect).
Parameter Setting Explanation
Rx Velocity On, 1~127 Allows you to switch
the reception (RX) of velocity messages on or off. If you don’t need “On”, specify which velocity value to use instead of the con­tinuous flux.
Rx Sysex Off, On Use this parameter to
specify whether the BK-7m should receive SysEx messages from other devices.
Tx Sysex Off, On Use this parameter to
specify whether the BK-7m should send SysEx messages.
Tx Data Change Off, On This parameter allows
you to specify how the original program changes of the songs you play back are transmitted via MIDI. The BK-7m may change sound addresses (usually CC00 and CC32 values) so as to play back all songs with the best possible quality. If you switch this parameter on, such real-time transformations are also transmitted via MIDI. If you switch this parameter off, the original sound addresses are trans­mitted to the receiv­ing device. (But the BK-7m’s tone genera­tor continues to “enhance” the songs you play back.)
Parameter Setting Explanation
Soft Thru Off, Global,
Piano
Select “Global” if the BK-7m should transmit all MIDI messages it receives (using its MIDI OUT socket). Select “Piano” if you wish to connect the BK-7m to a digital piano.

Save MIDI Set

This function allows you to save your changes to a “User” memory for quick recall.
This function can be selected using [MENU] button ‰ “MIDI” ‰ “Save MIDI Set”.
1.
Edit the desired MIDI parameters (“Edit Style Parts”, “Edit Song Parts”, “Edit Tone Parts”, “Edit System”).
2.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the MIDI Set where you want to save your settings (“User1”~ “User8”).
3.
Press [WRITE] button to confirm.
A confirmation message informs you that the MIDI Set has been saved.
Mastering Tools
The BK-7m contains two effects processors that apply to all real time parts and Style and Song parts.
These processors are collectively called the “Mastering Tools”, because they allow you to perfect the signal mix to adapt it to the sound system you are using.
The parameters discussed here can be selected using [MENU] button ‰ “Mastering Tools”.

SMF/Style Compressor

This multi-band compressor/limiter allows you to pro­cess three frequency ranges separately. A compressor reduces high levels (peaks) and boosts low levels, smoothing out fluctuations in volume.
71
Page 72
Backing Module BK-7m
Menu options
To edit the SMF/Style Compressor parameters, use [MENU] button ‰ “Mastering Tools” ‰ “SMF/Style Com­pressor”.
1.
Select an SMF song or a Music Style and start playback.
2.
Set the “Switch” parameter to “On” to acti­vate the compressor.
The compressor is now active and will affect SMF song or Music Style playback. (Select “Off” to switch the compressor back off.)
3.
Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the “Preset” parameter, then press the dial.
4.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select one of the available presets, then press the dial.
The available presets are:
1. Hard Comp
2. Soft Comp
3. Low Boost
5.
If none of the preset memories contains the
4. Mid Boost
5. High Boost
6. Standard
7. User
settings you need, use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select and set the following parame­ters:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Level 0~127 Use this parameter to set
the compressor’s input level. The higher the value, the stronger the three frequency bands are compressed. The value you set here is added to the “Level” settings of the three bands. If you set this parameter to “0”, the compressor has no effect on the output signal.
Gain –12~0~
12dB
High/Mid/Low: Because “Attack”, “Release”, “Threshold”, “Ratio” and “Level” are the same for each band, we will only discuss them once. As you see, each of the three fre­quency ranges has its own set of parameters that allow you to specify their behavior.
Use this parameter to cor­rect the level at the com­pressor’s outputs. If the settings of the remaining parameters lead to a signifi­cantly lower level, select a positive value. If your set­tings lead to a significantly higher level, select a nega­tive value. “0” means that the level is neither boosted nor attenuated.
r
Parameter Setting Explanation
Attack 0~100ms Use this parameter to spec-
ify how fast the compressor of the band in question should start processing the signal once the level of that band exceeds the “Thresh­old” level. Choose a smaller value if you prefer a com­pression similar to that of FM radio stations. Higher values may yield a “snap­pier” or “funkier” sound.
Release 50~
5000ms
Threshold –36~0dB This parameter allows you to
Ratio 1:1.0~
1:INF
Level –24~
+24dB
Split High 2000~
12000Hz
Split Low 80~800Hz
This parameter allows you to specify how fast the com­pressor of the corresponding band should stop working when the signal level drops below the “Threshold” value.
set the level the frequency band (“High”, “Mid” or “Low”) must reach to trigger its compressor. The lower the value, the more notice­able the compression will be.
Use this parameter to spec­ify how strongly the level should be reduced when the band’s level exceeds the “Threshold” level. “1:2.0”, for example, means that level values above the “Threshold” level are halved. “1:INF” is useful if you set “Threshold” to “0dB” or thereabout. This produces a limiter effect, which means that no signal level will ever exceed the “Threshold” value. This may help you protect the speak­ers of the PA system etc.
This parameter allows you to establish the desired mix among the three compressor bands. Choose a negative value to decrease the level, or a positive one to increase it. Choose “0” for a band whose level is OK as is.
These two parameters spec­ify the frequency where two bands are separated. The compressor has three bands, and so there are two cross­over frequencies you can set: “High” between the “Mid” and “High” ranges; and “Low” between the “Mid” and “Low” ranges.
72
Page 73
Backing Module BK-7m
r
Mastering Tools
Write User
This function allows you to save the settings you made on the “SMF/Style Compressor” page.
1.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “YES”, then press the dial to save the cur­rent settings.
The display shows a confirmation message. If you don’t want to define the current settings as
the default state, rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “NO”, then press the dial. The BK-7m then returns to the “SMF/Style Compressor” page.
NOTE
There is only one “User” memory for your own settings. By saving new settings, you therefore overwrite the previous ones.
NOTE
When you switch on the BK-7m, it automatically loads the “User” settings.

SMF/Style Equalizer

To edit the SMF/Style Equalizer parameters, use [MENU] button ‰ “Mastering Tools” ‰ “SMF/Style Equalizer”.
5.
If none of the preset memories contains the settings you need, you can change the fol­lowing parameters using the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial.
Parameter Setting range Explanation
Level 0~127 Use this parameter to set
the equalizer’s input level. This may be neces­sary when the level of the input signals is so high that the sound dis­torts.
NOTE
Do not set this param­eter to “0” if the equal­izer is switched on, because doing so means that the SMF song/Music Style is no longer audible.
Gain –9~0~9dB Use this parameter to
correct the level at the equalizer’s outputs. If the settings of the remaining parameters lead to a significantly lower level, select a posi­tive value. If your set­tings lead to a significantly higher level, select a negative value. “0” means that the level is neither boosted nor attenuated.
The equalizer has the same function as the TREBLE, MID and BASS knobs on a mixer: it allows you to color the sound, or to apply tonal corrections.
1.
Select an SMF song or a Music Style and start playback.
2.
Set the “Switch” parameter to “On” to acti­vate the equalizer.
The equalizer is now active and will affect SMF song or Music Style playback. (Select “Off” to switch the equalizer back off.)
3.
Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the “Preset” parameter, then press the dial.
4.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select one of the available presets, then press the dial.
The available presets are:
1. Flat
2. Rock
3. Pop
4. Jazz
5. Classic
6. Standard
7. User
High Frequency
High Gain –15~15dB Use this parameter to set
Mid Fre­quency
Mid Q 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8 Use this parameter to
2000~ 12000Hz
200~8000Hz Allows you to set the
Allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the high band (this is a shelving filter).
the level of the selected “High” frequency. Posi­tive values boost (increase the volume of) that frequency band, negative values cut (attenuate) it.
cutoff frequency of the middle band (this is a peaking filter).
specify the width of the “Mid Frequency” band that you want to boost or cut. Smaller values mean that neighboring frequencies above/below that value are also affected.
73
Page 74
Backing Module BK-7m
Menu options
Parameter Setting range Explanation
Mid Gain –15~15dB Use this parameter to set
the level of the selected “Mid” frequency.
1.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “Write User”, then press the dial.
Low Fre­quency
Low Gain –15~15dB Use this parameter to set
Write User
This function allows you to save the settings you made on the “SMF/Style Equalizer” page.
1.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
50, 80, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400Hz
Allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the low band (this is a shelv­ing filter).
the level of the selected “Low” frequency.
“YES”, then press the dial to save the cur­rent settings.
The display shows a confirmation message. If you don’t want to define the current settings as
the default state, rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “NO”, then press the dial. The BK-7m then returns to the “SMF/Style Equalizer” page.
2.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “YES”, then press the dial to save the cur­rent settings.
The display shows a confirmation message. If you don’t want to define the current settings as
the default state, rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “NO”, then press the dial. The BK-7m then returns to the “Tone/Part Compressor” page.
NOTE
There is only one “User” memory for your own settings. By saving new settings, you therefore overwrite the previous ones.
NOTE
When you switch on the BK-7m, it automatically loads the “User” settings.

Tone/Part Equalizer

To edit the Tone/Part Equalizer parameters, use [MENU] button ‰ “Mastering Tools” ‰ “Tone/Part Equalizer”.
NOTE
There is only one “User” memory for your own settings. By saving new settings, you therefore overwrite the previous ones.
NOTE
When you switch on the BK-7m, it automatically loads the “User” settings.

Tone/Part Compressor

This multi-band compressor/limiter affects the real-time parts. It allows you to process three frequency ranges separately. A compressor reduces high levels (peaks) and boosts low levels, smoothing out fluctuations in volume.
To edit the Tone/Part Compressor parameters, use [MENU] button ‰ “Mastering Tools” ‰ “Tone/Part Com­pressor”.
See “SMF/Style Compressor” on p. 71 for an explana­tion of the available parameters.
Saving the compressor settings
To save the compressor settings and ensure that they will be loaded each time you switch on the BK-7m:
The equalizer has the same function as the TREBLE, MID and BASS knobs on a mixer: it allows you to color the sound, or to apply tonal corrections. The equalizer discussed here allows you to process the real-time parts.
See “SMF/Style Equalizer” on p. 73 for an explanation of the available parameters.
Saving the equalizer settings
To save the equalizer settings and ensure that they will be loaded each time you switch on the BK-7m:
1.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “Write User”, then press the dial.
2.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “YES”, then press the dial to save the cur­rent settings.
The display shows a confirmation message.
r
74
Page 75
Backing Module BK-7m

Makeup Tools (Style and SMF)

r
If you don’t want to define the current settings as the default state, rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “NO”, then press the dial. The BK-7m then returns to the “Tone/Part Compressor” page.
NOTE
There is only one “User” memory for your own settings. By saving new settings, you therefore overwrite the previous ones.
NOTE
When you switch on the BK-7m, it automatically loads the “User” settings.
Makeup Tools (Style and SMF)
These functions allows you to actually edit the selected Music Style or SMF song (Standard MIDI File) without paying too much attention to the underlying parame­ters.
NOTE
The “Style Makeup Tools” and “Song Makeup Tools” functions cannot be used to edit Standard MIDI Files that use the XG format.
This menu allows you to select the following entries:
Menu Option Explanation
Common Select this entry to change common
parameters that affect the Music Style or song as a whole, like the reverb or chorus effect, the tempo, etc.
Instrument Select this entry to change the instru-
ments used in the Music Style or song and their parameters. See page 76.
Freeze Data Select this entry to “burn” your new set-
tings into the file. Doing so will allow you to use your new version with any sequencer (software) or compatible Roland arranger instrument. See page 81.
Save Select this entry to save your song with
the “Song Makeup Tools” settings you have made. See page 81.

Common

To edit the Common parameters, use [MENU] button ‰ “Makeup Tools” ‰ “Common”.

Using the Makeup Tools

1.
Select the Music Style or SMF song you wish to modify (see p. 35).
You can also select an internal Music Style.
2.
Press the [START/STOP] button to start play­back of the song or Music Style.
This allows you to listen to the song or Music Style before you start editing it. If you selected a Music Style, remember to play a chord on the external MIDI controller. Press the [START/STOP] button again to halt playback.
3.
Press the [MENU] button.
4.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “Makeup Tools”, then press the dial.
If you selected a Music Style in step (1), the display changes to:
If you selected an SMF song in step (1), the display changes to:
The “Common” parameters on this page apply to the entire song or Music Style.
1.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the desired “Common” parameter, then press the dial.
The following parameters are available: Reverb Type: This parameter allows you to specify
what kind of reverb effect you need. The available reverb types are:
Setting Meaning
Original This setting means that the song uses its own
(programmed) reverb settings.
Room1, Room2, Room3
These types simulate the reverb characteris­tics of a room. The higher the number (1, 2 or
3), the bigger the “room” becomes.
75
Page 76
Backing Module BK-7m
Menu options
Setting Meaning
Hall1, Hall2
Plate This algorithm simulates the acoustics of a
Delay A delay effect (no reverb). Works a lot like an
Pan Delay This is a stereo version of the above delay
Chorus Type: Chorus broadens the spatial image of the sound and creates a stereo impression. You can choose from 8 types of chorus.
Setting Meaning
Original The song uses its own (programmed)
Chorus 1~4
Fbk Chorus This is a chorus with a flanger-like effect
These types simulate the reverb of a small (1) or large (2) concert hall and thus sound much “bigger” than the Room types above.
concert hall.
echo effect and thus repeats the sounds.
effect. It creates repetitions that alternate between the left and right channels.
chorus settings.
These are conventional chorus effects that add spaciousness and depth to the sound.
and a soft sound.
NOTE
The changes you make using the procedure described above can be “burned” into the Music Style song file using the “Freeze Data” command (see p. 81). Doing so will allow you to hear those changes on any sequencer (software) you use. Changes you don’t “freeze” are nevertheless stored when you save the edited Music Style song file—but only the BK-7m can read them.

Instrument

To edit the Instrument parameters, use [MENU] button ‰ “Makeup Tools” ‰ “Instrument”.
The display now shows all instruments used by the selected Music Style or SMF song.
1.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] to select the instrument you want to change, then press the dial.
Flanger This is an effect that sounds somewhat
like a jet airplane taking off and landing.
ShortDly This is a full-fledged delay effect that
can be used instead of a chorus or flanger. As you will see, there are a lot of parameters you can program.
Short Dly FB This is a short delay with many repeats.
Reverb Level & Chorus Level: These parameters allow you to modify the output level of the Reverb (or Chorus) processor.
Style Volume/Song Volume: This parameter allows you to set the overall volume of the selected Style or song if you think it is too loud/soft.
Style Tempo/Song Tempo: Allows you to change the Style’s or song’s tempo (q= 20~250).
Transpose: This parameter allows you to transpose all song parts (except the drums) up to 12 semitones (1 octave) up or down. This value is written to the song data and used every time you play back this song.
NOTE
This parameters is not available for Music Styles.
Undo Changes: Select this entry to cancel all “Style/ Song Makeup Tools” settings you have made and to revert to the previously saved version.
2.
If you are satisfied with your changes and wish to preserve them, save your Music Style song to the USB memory.
See “Saving your new Music Style or song (SMF) ver­sion” on p. 81.
r
The display changes to:
The [MENU] button’s indicator flashes.
2.
Press the [MENU] button to jump to the location where the instrument is used.
Playback starts automatically from that point.
3.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] to select the parameter you wish to edit, then press the dial.
NOTE
The Style and Song Makeup Tools environments do not support the BK-7m’s SuperNATURAL sounds, which can therefore not be selected.
76
Page 77
Backing Module BK-7m
Makeup Tools (Style and SMF)
r
NOTE
If you select a Drum Set in step (1) above, the parameter list looks slightly different than for instruments that do not use a Drum Set. “Drum Sets” are special “Tones” that assign different sounds to most keys/note numbers, allowing you (and the BK-7m) to play realistic drum and percussion parts.
In the following, “(T)” refers to parameters that are only available for regular instruments (also called “Tones”), while “(D)” refers to parameters that are only available for Drum Sets.
The following parameters are available:
Families (T)
Allows you to select a different Tone family. See page 91 for a list of available Tones and Drum Sets.
After selecting a new family, you can press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and then rotate it to select a Tone from that family
Parameter Explanation
Families The BK-7m’s Tones are grouped into 15
families: piano, guitar, bass, strings, etc.
Perc Mute (D)
Suppresses (or adds) the percussion sounds used by the drum part.
Parameter Value
Perc Mute Off, On
Volume
Adjusts the volume of the selected instrument. Nega­tive values decrease the current volume, positive val­ues increase it. (This is a relative setting that is added to, or subtracted from, the original setting.)
Parameter Setting
Volume -127~0~+127
Reverb
Use this parameter to set the reverb send level. Nega­tive values decrease the current reverb send level, positive values increase it. (This is a relative setting that is added to, or subtracted from, the original set­ting.)
Parameter Setting
Reverb -127~0~+127
Tone (T), Drum (D)
Allows you to select a different Tone within the active Tone family. See page 91 for a list of available Tones and Drum Sets.
While selecting a Tone, you can press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and then rotate it to select a different family.
Parameter Explanation
Tone (T) Drum (D)
The number of Tones depends on the selected family.
Mute (T)/Drum Mute (D)
Switches the selected instrument off. The corre­sponding part is no longer played back. (This setting only applies to the selected instrument and thus not necessarily to the entire track.)
NOTE
In the case of the drums, you can mute two instrument groups (“Drum Mute” and “Perc Mute”, see below) sepa­rately.
Parameter Setting
Mute (T) Drum Mute (D)
Off, On
Solo
Switches off all instruments except the selected instrument.
Parameter Setting
Solo Off, On
Chorus
Use this parameter to set the chorus send level. Neg­ative values decrease the current chorus send level, positive values increase it. (This is a relative setting that is added to, or subtracted from, the original set­ting.)
Parameter Setting
Chorus -127~0~+127
Panpot
Use this parameter to change the stereo placement of the selected instrument. “0” means “no change”, negative (–) values shift the instrument towards the left and positive (+) values shift it towards the right.
Parameter Setting
Panpot -127~0~+127
NOTE
In the case of Drum Sets, this setting applies to all drum/ percussion instruments. There is also a parameter that can be set for specific drum instruments. See page 80.
Octave (T)
Use this parameter to transpose the selected instru­ment up or down by up to 4 octaves.
Parameter Setting
Octave -4~0~+4
Velocity
This parameter allows you to modify the velocity range of the instrument in question. “0” means that the recorded velocity values are left untouched, neg-
77
Page 78
Backing Module BK-7m
Menu options
ative values reduce all velocity values by the same amount (leaving differences between notes intact), while positive settings increase all velocity values.
Parameter Setting
Velocity -127~+127
Cut Off
This filter parameter allows you to make the selected sound darker or brighter. Positive settings mean that more overtones are allowed to pass, so that the sound becomes brighter. The further this value is set in the negative direction, the fewer overtones will be allowed to pass and the sound will become softer (darker).
Setting
Parameter Setting
Cut Off -127~+127
Characteristics of a low-pass filter
Frequency
Cutoff frequency
Decay (T)
This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound’s volume and cutoff frequency fall from the highest point of the attack down to the sustain level.
Parameter Setting
Decay -127~+127
NOTE
Percussive sounds usually have a sustain level of “0”. Piano and guitar sounds are in this category. Holding the keys for a long time will have little effect on the duration of the notes you are playing, even if you select a high value here.
Release (T)
This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound will decay after the note is released until it is no longer heard. The cutoff frequency will also fall according to this setting.
Parameter Setting
Release -127~+127
NOTE
Some sounds already contain natural (sampled) vibrato whose depth or speed cannot be changed.
NOTE
For some sounds, positive (+) “Cut Off” settings will cause no noticeable change because the preprogrammed “Cut Off” parameter is already set to its maximum value.
Resonance
This is a parameter one invariably associates with a synthesizer. When the “Resonance” value is increased, the overtones in the area of the cutoff frequency will be emphasized, creating a sound with a strong char­acter.
Parameter Setting
Resonance -127~+127
NOTE
For some sounds, negative (–) “Resonance” settings may produce no noticeable change because the resonance is already set to the minimum value.
The following parameters allow you to set the sound’s “envelope”. The envelope parameters affect both the volume (TVA) and the filter (TVF). The cutoff frequency will rise as the envelope rises and fall as the envelope falls.
Attack (T)
This parameter adjusts the onset of the sound. Nega­tive values speed up the attack, so that the sound becomes more aggressive.
Parameter Setting
Use the following three parameters if you think the instrument in question has too much (or could use a little more) vibrato.
Vibrato Rate (T)
This parameter adjusts the speed of the pitch modu­lation. Positive (+) settings make the preset pitch modulation faster, and negative (–) settings make it slower.
Parameter Setting
Vibrato Rate -127~+127
Vibrato Depth (T)
This parameter adjusts the intensity of the pitch modulation. Positive (+) settings mean that the “wobble” becomes more prominent, while negative (–) settings make it shallower.
Parameter Setting
Vibrato Depth -127~+127
Vibrato Delay (T)
This parameter adjusts the time required for the vibrato effect to begin. Positive (+) settings increase the time before vibrato will begin and negative set­tings (–) shorten the time.
Parameter Setting
Vibrato Delay -127~+127
Attack -127~+127
r
78
Page 79
Backing Module BK-7m
Makeup Tools (Style and SMF)
r
Mfx
The BK-7m contains three multi-effect processors (“Mfx”), one reverb processor and one chorus proces­sor that can be used to process Music Styles or Stan­dard MIDI Files.
Select “Off” for instruments that don’t need to be processed by any Mfx.
Parameter Setting
Mfx Off, A, B, C
NOTE
If you select “A”, “B” or “C”, additional parameters can be edited (see below).
Mfx Type
Allows you to select the desired Mfx type, i.e. the kind of effect you need. Each Mfx (“A”, “B” and “C”) can be assigned to as many instruments as you like. Be aware, however, that selecting a different type will affect all instruments that use this Mfx processor. See page 55 for a list of the available Mfx types.
NOTE
Each Mfx (“A”, “B” and “C”) can be assigned to as many instruments as you like. Be aware, however, that selecting a different type will affect all instruments that use this Mfx processor.
Edit EQ
To edit the equalizer parameters, press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to jump to the “Edit EQ” page. You can then use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to edit the available parameters:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Equalizer Off, On Activate this setting if
you want to change the timbre of the selected instrument. This parameter dupli­cates the “Equalizer” above and was added for your convenience.
High Freq 1500 Hz, 2000
Hz, 3000 Hz, 4000 Hz, 6000 Hz, 8000 Hz, 12000 Hz
High Gain –15~+15 dB Use this parameter to
Allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the high band (this is a shelving filter).
set the level of the selected “High” fre­quency. Positive val­ues boost (increase the volume of) that fre­quency, negative val­ues cut (attenuate) it.
NOTE
While the “Mfx” parameter is set to “Off”, you cannot select a different type. In that case, the display will show the message “---”.
Mfx Edit
If you also want to edit the parameters of the selected effect type, press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to jump to the “Mfx Edit” page. You can then use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to edit the available parame­ters.
See “MFX types and parameters” on p. 107 for the parameters that are available for the selected Mfx type.
NOTE
While the “Mfx” parameter is set to “Off”, you cannot edit the Mfx parameters. In that case, the display will show the message “No Edit”.
Equalizer
Activate this setting if you want to change the timbre of the selected instrument.
Parameter Setting
Equalizer Off, On
Mid Freq 200~8000 Hz Allows you to set the
cutoff frequency of the middle band (this is a peaking filter).
Mid Q 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8 Use this parameter to
specify the width of the “Mid Freq” band that you want to boost or cut. Smaller values mean that neighboring frequencies above/ below that value are also affected.
Mid Gain –15~1+5 dB Use this parameter to
set the level of the selected “Mid Freq”. Positive values boost (increase the volume of) that frequency, negative values cut (attenuate) it.
Low Freq 90 Hz, 150 Hz,
180 Hz, 300 Hz, 360 Hz, 600 Hz
Allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the low band (this is a shelving filter).
Low Gain –15~+15 dB Use this parameter to
set the level of the selected “Low” fre­quency.
79
Page 80
Backing Module BK-7m
Menu options
Drum Instrument (D)
If you want to edit the settings for specific instru­ments of the selected Drum Set, press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to jump to the “Drum Instru­ment” page.
If you want to edit the settings for specific instru­ments of the selected Drum Set, press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to jump to the “Drum Instru­ment” page.
You can then use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to edit the available parameters.
Parameter Value Explanation
Instr. All Drum Set
Instruments
Parameters for the selected instrument
Mute Off, On Suppress (or add) the
Solo Off, On Switch off all instru-
Volume -127~+127 Use this parameter to
Reverb -127~+127 Use this parameter to
Chorus -127~+127 Use this parameter to
Panpot -127~+127 Use this parameter to
Select the drum instru­ment you want to edit.
selected instrument.
ments except the selected instrument.
set the volume of the selected drum instru­ment.
set the reverb send level of the selected drum instrument. The effect itself can be changed on the “Com­mon” page.
set the chorus send level of the selected drum instrument. The effect itself can be changed on the “Com­mon” page.
set the stereo place­ment of the selected drum instrument. “0” means “no change”, negative values shift the instrument towards the left and positive values shift it towards the right.
Parameter Value Explanation
Velocity -127~+127 This parameter allows
you to modify the velocity range of the drum instrument in question. “0” means that the recorded val­ues are left untouched, a negative setting reduces all velocity values by the same amount (leaving varia­tions intact). A posi­tive setting shifts all velocity values in a positive direction.
Pitch -127~+127 Use this parameter to
tune the selected drum instrument higher or lower. “0” means that the pitch is left unchanged.
Instr. Equalizer Global, Instr,
Off
Edit EQ (Press the
[CURSOR÷VAL UE] dial)
Undo Changes (Press the
[CURSOR÷VAL UE] dial)
4.
If you are satisfied with your changes and
Global: The drum
instrument uses the equalizer settings of the Drum Set it belongs to. Instr: The drum instru­ment uses its own equalizer settings (see below). Off: The drum instru­ment is not equalized.
Provides access to the EQ parameters of the currently selected drum instrument (if “Instr. Equalizer” is set to “Int”). See “Edit EQ” on p. 79 for a descrip­tion of the available parameters.
This function allows you to cancel the “Drum Instrument (D)” settings of the cur­rently selected instru­ment and to revert to the previously saved version.
wish to preserve them, save your Music Style song to the USB memory.
See “Saving your new Music Style or song (SMF) ver­sion” on p. 81.
r
80
Page 81
Backing Module BK-7m
Makeup Tools (Style and SMF)
r
NOTE
The changes you make using the procedure described above can be “burned” into the Music Style song file using the “Freeze Data” command (see p. 81). Doing so will allow you to hear those changes on any sequencer (software) you use. Changes you don’t “freeze” are nevertheless stored when you save the edited Music Style song file—but only the BK-7m can read them.

Freeze Data

To commit your settings, use [MENU] button ‰ “Makeup Tools” ‰ “Freeze Data”.
Before saving your “made-up” song to a USB memory, you can (but you don’t have to) “commit” your changes, thereby turning them into “regular” Music Style or song data.
This may come in handy if you also want to play back your new Music Style song version on another arranger instrument, sequencer or your computer. This operation is unnecessary for files you only want to use with the BK-7m or one of the models mentioned above.

Saving your new Music Style or song (SMF) version

1.
If you are happy with your changes and wish to preserve them, select the “Save” parame­ter.
The display changes to:
4.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the desired character.
5.
Press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to confirm your selection (the cursor changes to an underscore).
6.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] to select the character position you want to change, then press the dial.
7.
Repeat steps (4)~(6) to complete the name.
8.
Press the [WRITE] button to confirm your desire to save the song.
The display briefly confirms the operation and then returns to the “Style Makeup Tools” or “Song Makeup Tools” page.
The display shows the location of the file you loaded and subsequently edited.
NOTE
Even Music Styles or songs for which you did not perform the “Freeze Data” command need to be saved using this procedure if you want to keep the changes.
2.
Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select a dif­ferent location if you do not want to over­write the original version.
3.
Press the [WRITE] button (it flashes).
PERFORMANCE
WRITE
If the USB memory already contains a Music Style or song file of that name, you will be asked whether you want to overwrite it:
In this case, select “YES” using the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to replace the old file with the new one (the old file will be lost).
Otherwise, select “NO” to return to the “Save” page and enter a different name.
81
Page 82
Backing Module BK-7m
Menu options
V-LINK function
The BK-7m has a powerful new interface for realtime audio-and-video integration. V-LINK ( ) is a function that allows music and images to be performed together. When V-Link compatible devices are con­nected via MIDI, you’ll be able to easily enjoy a variety of visual effects that are linked to the expressive ele­ments of your performance.
For example, if you use the BK-7m with the EDIROL P-10, you’ll be able to use the various controls on the BK-7m’s front panel to switch and control images on the EDIROL P-10.
In order to enjoy V-LINK with the BK-7m and the EDIROL P-10, you’ll need to make connections using a MIDI cable (sold separately).
2.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the “V-Link” entry, then press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial.
3.
Use the following controls on the front panel to control the Edirol P-10.
Operation V-LINK
Press [8 BEAT/ 16 BEAT]
Press [LIVE BAND] Switch images
Switch images (Clip 1)
(Clip 2)
MIDI message
CF 00
CF 01
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
Image output
Edirol P-10 Visual
Projector
NOTE
To prevent malfunction and speaker damage, you must mini­mize the volume on all equipment and turn off their power before you make any connections.
1.
Press the [MENU] button.
MENU
Sampler
Press [ROCK] Switch images
(Clip 3)
Press [DISCO DANCE]
Press [BALL ROOM] Switch images
Press [50’s & 60’s] Switch images
Press [JAZZ/BLUES] Switch images
Press [LATIN] Switch images
Press [BOSSA/ SAMBA]
Press [TRADIT/ WORLD]
Press [VARIATION 1] ‰ [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial
Press [VARIATION 2] ‰ [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial
Switch images (Clip 4)
(Clip 5)
(Clip 6)
(Clip 7)
(Clip 8)
Switch images (Clip 9)
Switch images (Clip 10)
Control the image (Bank Select 0~13)
Control the image Color Cr Control (0~127)
CF 02
CF 03
CF 04
CF 05
CF 06
CF 07
CF 08
CF 09
BF 00 00~13
BF 47 00~7F
The display changes to:
r
82
Press [VARIATION 3] Control the image
Playback Speed (0~
127)
NOTE
See the owner’s manual of the P-10 for the effects pro­duced with these commands.
EF 00 00~ 00 40~7F 7F
Page 83

Factory Reset

The following function allows you to recall the BK-7m’s original factory settings. This has no effect on the data stored on a USB memory.
1.
Press the [MENU] button.
MENU
The display changes to:
Backing Module BK-7m
2.
Press the [MENU] button.
MENU
3.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the “Format USB Device” entry, then press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial.
r
Factory Reset
2.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the “Factory Reset” entry, then press the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial.
3.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “YES”, then press the dial to load the factory settings.
Select “NO” if you don’t want to delete the playlist step after all.
A confirmation message informs you that the BK-7m has been initialized.

Formatting a USB memory

This function allows you to format the connected USB memory.
USB memories using the FAT-32 file system may not need to be formatted. We nevertheless recommend for­matting all new USB storage devices with the BK-7m.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Formatting a USB memory means that all files (songs, Music Styles, etc.) it contains are lost. Always check the contents of the memory before deciding to format it.
1.
Connect the a USB storage you want to for­mat device to the MEMORY port on the BK-7m’s rear panel.
4.
Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “YES”, then press the dial to format the USB memory.
A confirmation message informs you that the USB memory has been formatted.
The following folders are created on the USB memory
Name Value
My Performances This folder is used to save Perfor-
mance Lists. (The contents of this folder cannot be viewed by pressing the [USB MEMORY] button. You need to press the PERFORMANCE [LIST] button gain access to the files it con­tains. The contents can be viewed on a computer, however.)
My Recordings This folder is used to store your audio
recordings (see p. 46).
My Songs This folder can be used to save SMF
songs you edited with the “Cover” (see p. 48) or “Makeup Tools” func­tions (see p. 75) functions.
My Styles This folder can be used to save Music
Styles you edited with the “Cover” (see p. 48) or “Makeup Tools” func­tions (see p. 75) functions.
NOTE
We recommend copying the contents of your USB memory to your computer before formatting it.
83
Page 84
Backing Module BK-7m
Using the BK-7m with SONAR LE
16. Using the BK-7m with SONAR LE
The BK-7m comes bundled with the Cakewalk SONAR LE software that runs on Windows computers. Installing this pow­erful software allows you to use the BK-7m as a versatile multitimbral sound module, adding top-notch sounds to your PC-based music productions. You can create your own SMF music databases with SONAR LE, using the BK-7m as sound module by connecting it to one of your computer’s USB ports. Once the SMF files are ready, you can play the back directly on the BK-7m (without using SONAR LE).
Computer
NOTE
When using the BK-7m in this way, we recommend not starting Music Style or Song playback on the BK-7m itself and to only use it as a sound module.
USB port
NOTE
In order to perform the following procedure, you’ll need to log onto Windows as a user whose account type is Administrator.
NOTE
Please do not connect any MIDI cable to the BK-7m’s MIDI IN or MIDI OUT socket while it is connected to your one of your computer’s USB ports.
To import the instrument definitions into SONAR LE, please see SONAR LE’s help “Importing Instrument Defi­nition”.
For any other information, please see SONAR LE’s help.

Installing Sonar LE

1.
Start your computer.
2.
Close any open programs you have running.
3.
Place the DVD-ROM in your DVD-ROM drive.
4.
Double-click the following icon in the folder on the DVD-ROM to install:
[SONAR_LE] Folder -
5.
Follow the installation instruction on the screen.
BK-7m instrument definitions
A special “BK-7m.ins” file with information about the Tones and Drum Sets inside the BK-7m can be down­loaded from Roland’s website: www.Roland.com. By importing that file into SONAR LE, you can conveniently select the BK-7m’s Tones and Drum Sets with your mouse.
r
84
Getting Help
SONAR LE’s online help opens when you click the Help button in the SONAR LE Toolbar. The help file includes tabs for the index, the search page, and the favorites page. Also, most dialog boxes and modules have Help buttons that display help that is specific to that particular dialog or module.
•Registration is required for continued use of the product, and may be done by internet. Instructions and Cakewalk’s privacy policy will be detailed to you during launch of the product.
•In the “Product” column on the registration page, you should select SONAR LE.
NOTE
Cakewalk is a registered trademark, and SONAR and Cake­walk logo are trademarks of Cakewalk, Inc. Lexicon Pantheon is a trademark of Lexicon Pro, a Harman International Company. Copyright © 2011 BOSS CORPORATION
Page 85
Backing Module BK-7m
17. Troubleshooting
Symptom Action Page
r

Troubleshooting

Power does not turn on. Is the included AC adaptor/power cord correctly connected to an
AC outlet and to the BK-7m? Do not use any AC adaptor or power cord other than the ones included. Doing so will cause malfunctions.
No sound from the BK-7m. Did you connect the BK-7m to an external amplifier or mixing
console? And did you switch it on?
Could the [VOLUME] knob be turned down? Select a higher set­ting.
Are the MIDI and audio connections correct? Please check the audio and MIDI connection
Can you hear sound through headphones? If you can hear sound through headphones, it may be that the connection cables are broken, or that your amp or speaker has malfunctioned. Check the cables and your equipment once again.
Perhaps, the external MIDI controller transmits on a different MIDI channel than the one the BK-7m expects. Start the wizard.
Could the part volume settings have been minimized? Check the “Volume” setting of each part.
Could a MIDI message received from an external MIDI device (vol­ume message or exclusive message) have lowered the volume?
The volume level of the instrument is too low when it is connected to an amplifier.
Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor? Use a connection cable that doesn’t contain a resistor.
15
15
15, 16
22
51, 59
69
The real-time parts (MBS, LWR, UP2, UP1) don’t receive MIDI messages.
The pitch of the selected Style/Song is incorrect. Is the “Tuning” setting appropriate?
Can’t hear the vocal of an audio file (mp3 or WAV).
Can’t hear the melody of SMF files.
A “buzz” is heard from the external amplifier Is the external amplifier or other device used with the BK-7m con-
The pitch of the selected song is incorrect. Is the “Tuning” setting appropriate?
Can’t play an audio/mp3-format song Is the song in a format that the BK-7m is able to read? 35
Are the MIDI connections correct? Please check the MIDI connec­tion
Does the button of the desired real-time part light. If not, switch it on.
The real-time parts may be receiving on a MIDI channel on which the MIDI controller doesn’t transmit. Correct the MIDI controller’s transmit channel or use the BK-7m’s wizard.
Did you transpose the Style /Song? Also check the “Style Scale Tune” and “Rx Shift” parameters.
If the [TRACK MUTE] (CENTER CANCEL) button is lit, the vocal sound will be attenuated. If the [TRACK MUTE] button is lit, the melody of the MIDI files will be muted. Switch it off.
nected to a different AC power outlet? Connect the amplifier or other device to the same AC outlet as the BK-7m.
Did you transpose the song?
16
22
62
38
62 37
85
Page 86
Backing Module BK-7m
Troubleshooting
Symptom Action Page
No sound when a MIDI device is connected to BK-7m.
After connecting the BK-7m’s COMPUTER port to your computer, the BK-7m doesn’t receive MIDI messages.
Unable to read from/write to USB memory. Are you using an (optional) Roland USB memory (M-UF series)?
Can’t save to USB memory. Could the USB memory be write protected?
Audio recording won’t start or stops unexpectedly. Are you using an (optional) Roland USB memory (M-UF-series)?
Are all devices powered on? Did you connect a MIDI cable Did you select the correct MIDI channel? Please see “Wizard Con- nection” on p. 22.
Is the appropriate “Rx” parameter active? If not, switch it on.
The BK-7m may be receiving on a MIDI channel on which the MIDI controller doesn’t transmit. Correct the MIDI controller’s transmit channel or use the BK-7m’s wizard.
Reliable performance cannot be guaranteed if you use non­Roland USB memory products.
Check the format of your USB memory. The BK-7m can use USB memory that has been formatted as FAT. If your USB memory was formatted using any other method, please re-format it using the BK-7m.
Is there sufficient free space on the USB memory?
Reliable performance cannot be guaranteed if you use non­Roland USB memory products.
Is there sufficient free space on the USB memory?
— 16 22
22
83
The external screen remains dark. Did you connect it to the VIDEO OUTPUT socket? 17
Did you switch on your TV or external screen—and did you select the correct channel? See the TV’s or screen’s owners manual for how to select the channel that corresponds to the video input to which the BK-7m is connected.
Are you using a supported TV or monitor screen?
Thin horizontal lines flicker in the television screen.
Can’t see the edge of the image on the television screen
Lyric display is wrong. For some types of music files, the lyrics may sometimes be dis-
Insufficient volume from a device connected to the BK-7m’s AUDIO INPUT sockets.
The songs won’t play. The file type of the song is not one of the file types that the
Thin horizontal lines may flicker on the television screen, but this is due to the television itself, and is not a malfunction of the BK-7m.
In some cases, the edge of the image may not be visible on the television screen, but this is due to the characteristics of the tele­vision and is not a malfunction on the BK-7m.
played incorrectly. Some words may be incorrectly shown outside the screen display area.
Could you be using a connection cable that contains a built-in resistor? Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor.
Check the setting of the AUDIO IN knob and correct it, if neces­sary.
35
BK-7m can play.
No Performance Lists are displayed. The USB memory doesn’t contain any Performance List files.
r
86
It may be that the song data is damaged.
For some reason the USB memory is not recognized.
Page 87
Backing Module BK-7m
r

‘Wizard Connection’ settings

18. ‘Wizard Connection’ settings
The “Wizard Connection” function (see p. 22) performs the following settings to ensure smooth communication with your external MIDI controller:
External instrument Settings
Category Type Performance & Global Settings Other settings
Octave LWR: +1
DIGITAL PIANO
ACCORDION
MASTER KEYBOARD
Split Point: G3
ROLAND
Performance Hold Lower Octave: On Split: Off Arr Type: Off
OTHERS
(See “Performance Hold” on p. 62)
Pedal: Perf. Next
(See “Pedal” on p. 64)
V-ACCORDION Octave LWR: +1
OTHERS1
Performance Hold Lower Octave: On Split: On
OTHERS2
Arr Type: On Bass Inversion: On
(See “Performance Hold” on p. 62)
Split Point: C4
ONE CHANNEL
Performance Hold Split: Off Arr Type: Off
(See “Performance Hold” on p. 62)
Performance Hold
MULTI CHANNEL
Split: On Arr Type: On
(See “Performance Hold” on p. 62)
Octave UP1: +1
[SPLIT] button off: Pianist [SPLIT] button lit: Intelligent
(See “Type” on p. 60) (See “Using Split mode” on p. 39)
MIDI Soft Thru: Piano
(See “Parameters” on p. 71)
[SPLIT] button off: Accordionist1 [SPLIT] button lit: Accordionist1
(See “Type” on p. 60) (See “Using Split mode” on p. 39)
[SPLIT] button off: Accordionist2 [SPLIT] button lit: Accordionist2
(See “Using Split mode” on p. 39)
[SPLIT] button off: Pianist [SPLIT] button lit: Intelligent
(See “Type” on p. 60) (See “Using Split mode” on p. 39)
[SPLIT] button off: Intelligent [SPLIT] button lit: Intelligent
(See “Type” on p. 60) (See “Using Split mode” on p. 39)
Performance Hold Tone Part: On Split: On
GUITAR
Arr Type: On Bass Inversion: On
(See “Performance Hold” on p. 62)
One Touch Hold
[SPLIT] button off: Guitarist [SPLIT] button lit: Guitarist
(See “Type” on p. 60) (See “Using Split mode” on p. 39)
Tone Part: On
(See “One Touch Hold” on p. 62)
Pedal: Perf. ChordRec Off
(See “Pedal” on p. 64)
CHURCH ORGAN1 Performance Hold
Split: On
CHURCH ORGAN2
DIGITAL ORGAN
ELECTRONIC ORGAN
Arr Type: On
(See “Performance Hold” on p. 62)
Performance Hold Split: On Arr Type: On
(See “Performance Hold” on p. 62)
[SPLIT] button off: Standard [SPLIT] button lit: Standard
(See “Type” on p. 60) (See “Using Split mode” on p. 39)
Pedal: Perf. Next
(See “Pedal” on p. 64)
COMPUTER/SEQUENCER No Settings No Settings
87
Page 88
Backing Module BK-7m

Music Style list

19. Music Style list
8 BEAT/16 BEAT 01 Frank's Way 02 Easy Ballad 03 Lying Beat 04 Sky Beat 05 Home Beat 06 Slow Beat 07 Thick Beat 08 Due Beat 09 Acoustic Ballad 10 Adult Contemp 11 Contemp Country 12 Gold Slow Beat 13 Gold Medium Beat 14 Romantic Ballad 15 Angel Ballad 16 Sunshine Pop 17 Blue Pop 18 British Pop 19 Sister Pop 20 Euro Ballad 21 Love Beat 22 Fast Beat 23 So Easy 24 Easy Pop 25 Natural Pop 26 Easy Beat 27 70's Pop 28 Heart Beat 29 Night Pop 30 Happy Pop 31 Easy Groove 32 Sweet Beat 33 Groovy Pop 34 Warm Pop 35 Fast Pop 36 80's Pop 37 Sunny Pop 38 Color Beat 39 Half Beat 40 Folk Beat 41 Your Ballad 42 Power Ballad 43 Guitar Pop 44 Soft Beat 45 Trendy Beat 46 Full Pop 47 Morn Pop 48 Poppin' 49 Love Ballad 50 Guitar Serenade 51 Guitar Beat 52 Piano Ballad 53 Billy Beat 54 Breakin' Beat 55 Fancy Beat 56 US Country Pop 57 Gold Beat 58 Friendly Beat 59 Radio Pop 60 Midnight Ballad 61 Pop Ballad 62 Light Soul 63 Schlager Beat 64 Nice Groove 65 Cute Pop 66 Hip Beat 67 Smooth Beat 68 Smile Pop 69 Analog Beat 70 Moonlight Pop
r
CC00 CC32
6 117 6 118 6 119 6 120 6 121 6 122 6 123 6 124 6 125 6 126
6 127 71 0 71 1
6 115
6 109
6 114
6 110
6 111
6 113
680
690
683
684
692
693
682
6 106
689
694 16 21
685
6 100
6 101
6 105
697
686
6 102
6 104
695
679
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
426
425
7 114
7 115
7 116
7 117
7 118
7 102
7 101
435
434
787
541
792
795
789
788
793
796
794
71 Ballad Slow Rock 72 Lovely Ballad 73 Latin Beat 74 70's Groove 75 UK Pop 76 Contemp Beat 77 Simply Pop 78 Home Pop 79 Power Pop 80 Electro Beat 81 Groovin' 82 Pop Shuffle 83 Light Beat 84 US Shuffle 85 UK Shuffle 86 Shuffle Fusion 87 Fast Beat Guitar 88 Dream Ballad
LIVE BAND 01 Eric Beat 02 Strummin' Pop 03 The Unplugged 04 Amazing Gospel 05 Night Ballad 06 6_8 Ballad 07 6_8 Pop 08 Unplugged Pop 09 Unplugged Ballad 10 Cool Live Band 11 Acoustic Pop 12 Live Pop 13 Guitar Shuffle 14 Real Band 15 Cool Pop 16 Light Pop 17 Soul Pop 18 Bright Pop
ROCK 01 Green Rock 02 Spring Rock 03 Broken Beat 04 Straight Rock 05 Joe's Rock 06 Countdown Rock 07 Cool Shuffle 08 Breaky Rock 09 Dark Rock 10 JuliRock 11 LoveRock 12 Happy Beat 13 Bright Rock 14 Easy Rock 15 Electro Rock 16 New Metal 17 MunichRock 18 Schlager Rock 19 German90Pop 20 Simple Rock 21 Rock Beat 22 Soft Rock 23 Light Rock 24 Groovy Rock 25 Smooth Rock 26 Big Rock 27 Power Rock 28 Fire Rock 29 Fast Rock 30 Rock Shuffle
7 103 436 790 783 782 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 422 423 424 798 797
CC00 CC32
68 14 68 11 68 13 68 12 68 5 68 7 68 9 68 2 68 1 68 8 68 6 68 3 68 18 68 10 68 4 68 15 68 16 68 17
CC00 CC32
183 180 181 182 172 169 176 168 170 173 177 164 159 161 162 163 174 175 171 165 166 160 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142
DISCO/DANCE 01 Beat Generation 02 Seventies 03 Volare Gipsy 04 Night'sDance 05 Hung Disco 06 Jamiro Dance 07 Just Disco 08 2000's Disco 09 Slow Disco 10 Gold Disco 11 Ladies Dance 12 UK Dance 13 Housing 14 Survive Disco 15 Dancin' 16 Earth Boogie 17 DJ Groove 18 Euro Dance 19 Dream Dance 20 Ibiza Dance 21 Ibiza Night 22 House Maillorca 23 Club House 24 DJ Techno 25 Hard Techno 26 80's Techno 27 Ballerman 28 Latin Dance 29 Gipsy Dance 30 Barry Dance 31 70's Disco 32 SchlagerShuffle 33 Schlagermichl 34 Reggaetone 35 Stadlschlager 36 70's Schlager 37 Alpenschlager 38 Schlag Disco Fox 39 AlpenParty 40 AlpenBallade 41 Disco Schlager 42 Latin Schlager 43 Dance Schlager 44 Happy Schlager 45 Party Schlager 46 Schlager Pop 47 Meneaito 48 Disco Gully 49 Latin Disco 50 Phunk Beat 51 Spear Beat 52 Baby Beat 53 Funky Groove 54 Downtown Funk 55 Wahoo Groove 56 Breath Rap 57 Cool Rap 58 Now Hip Hop 59 HipHop Beat 60 Hip'n Hop 61 Twostep 62 Contemporary Pop 63 Soul 64 Funky 65 Funky Pop 66 80's Groove 67 70's Beat 68 Smooth Contemp 69 Light Contemp 70 Acid Pop
CC00 CC32
22 46 27 25 70 2 22 44 70 1 22 15 22 16 27 24 27 23 27 9 27 10 27 12 22 17 22 18 22 28 22 26 22 27 22 19 66 60 66 61 66 62 66 63 66 64 66 57 66 58 66 59 66 56 66 65 66 28 66 32 66 27 66 21 66 26 66 34 66 33 66 5 66 3 66 6 66 12 66 10 66 9 66 7 66 8 66 2
548 22 39 61 7 66 13 66 4 66 30 66 29
812 66 31 66 22 66 25 66 35 66 24 66 23
546
547
545
544
543
542 22 38 66 11
292 28 21 28 22 28 19
88
Page 89
Backing Module BK-7m
r
Music Style list
71 Wave Jazz
BALL ROOM 01 Gold Wien Waltz 02 Wien Waltz 03 Vienne 04 Gold Slow Waltz 05 Slow Waltz 06 3_4 Boston 07 French Valse 08 It Valzer 09 Folk Valzer 1 10 Folk Valzer 2 11 Alpenwalzer 12 Polca Disco 13 It Polca 14 Polca 1 15 Polca 2 16 Manouche 17 Paso Doble 18 Paso Doble 2 19 Paso Doble 3 20 Gold Tango 21 Cool Tango 22 It Tango 23 Folk Tango 1 24 Folk Tango 2 25 Tango 26 Mazurca 1 27 Mazurca 2 28 Tarantella Disco 29 Tarantella 30 Gold Foxtrot 31 Gold Jive 32 Jive 33 Quick Step 34 Madison 35 It Fox 36 It Swing Fox 37 Fox Latino 38 Slow Fox 39 Gold Rhumba 40 Rhumba 41 Bolero 42 It Beguine 43 Romantic Beguine 44 Gold Cha Cha 45 Cha Cha 46 Simply Cha Cha 47 Cool Cha Cha 48 It Mambo 49 It Fast Mambo 50 It Cumbia 51 Simple Cumbia 52 It Hully Gully 53 It Meneito 54 It Bachata 55 Biguine 56 Gold Samba 57 Samba 58 Big Samba 59 Gold Bossa 60 Gold Euro March 61 Cool March
50’s & 60’s 01 Over Rockin' 02 Love Sl Rock 03 UK Rock'N 04 Baby Rock'N 05 Go! Rock'N 06 60's Rock'N 07 Good Rock'N 08 Blue Boogie 09 Fast Surf 10 Smooth Rock'N
28 20
CC00 CC32
17 55 17 38 17 46 17 56 17 39 17 44 17 45 17 57 17 42 17 43 17 49 19 33 19 34 19 25 19 26 69 4 40 4 40 5 40 6 26 17 26 15 26 18 26 13 26 14 26 12 17 40 17 41 53 7 53 6 34 14
7 119 69 1 69 2 69 3 50 88 50 89 50 90 50 81 23 13 23 11 55 2 39 27 39 26 24 17 24 14 24 13 24 15 38 14 38 15 46 5 46 4 22 50 22 48 22 49 39 20 27 26 27 21 27 22 22 47 20 24 20 23
CC00 CC32
556
557
551 10 39
536
537 10 24
538
534 10 22
11 Clock RocK'N 12 Brass Rock'N 13 Easy Slow Rock 14 50's Slow Rock 15 Oldies 16 Dream Slow Rock 17 Rock'N Slow 18 Go! Twist 19 Twist 20 50's Pop 21 Beach Surf 22 Romantic 6_8 23 Schlager 6_8 24 GermanOldie 25 Cool Slow Rock 26 Dixie 27 Combo boogie 28 Big Band Boogie 29 Charleston 30 Piano Rock'N 31 Piano Shuffle 32 Piano Ragtime
JAZZ/BLUES 01 BluEyesBand 02 OrganSwingMedium 03 Organ Jazz Fast 04 Gold Swing 05 Breezy Swing 06 Big Apple Band 07 Biggest Band 08 Bennys Big Band 09 Midnight SlSwing 10 Big Band Slow 11 Big Band Medium 12 Big Band Fast 13 Swing Medium 14 Modern Med Swing 15 Orchestra Swing 16 Strings Swing 17 Classic Big Band 18 Jazz Big Band 19 Swing Fast 20 Jz Guitar Swing 21 Gipsy Swing 22 Soft Ballad 23 Jazz Club 24 Medium Jazz 25 Smooth Med Swing 26 Scat Swing 27 Cool Swing 28 Bigger Band 29 Ensemble Swing 30 Combo Fast Swing 31 Slow Jz Waltz 32 Medium Jz Waltz 33 Piano Night 34 Piano Jazz 35 Jimmys Groove 36 Mustang Blues 37 Cool Soul 38 Fast Blues 39 Blues 40 R&B 41 Unplug Shuffle 42 Midnight Blues
LATIN 01 Carlos Beat 02 Orchestr Cha Cha 03 That's Mambo 04 Bachata 05 Go!Salsa 06 Cuba Salsa 07 Cool Merengue 08 Medium Gipsy
10 23 10 25
539 516 533 532
535 10 30 10 20 39 13 10 21
552
553
549
522 11 7
97
99 11 6 10 31 15 9 43 2
C00 C32
12 41 12 42 12 43 12 44 14 25 14 26 14 24 14 23 12 35 14 18 14 19 14 20 12 31 12 33 12 36 12 34 14 21 14 22 12 32 12 37 12 38 13 14 13 15 13 16 13 17 12 23 12 24 14 13 12 25 12 26 17 28 17 23 13 18 12 27 44 31 44 32 44 30 44 17 44 14 44 18 15 11 44 25
CC00 CC32
22 45 24 16 38 13 22 40 22 43 22 42 22 41 61 0
09 Fast Gipsy 10 Big Mambo 11 Mambo 12 Tradit Cha Cha 13 Dream Cha cha 14 Merengue 15 Fast Merengue 16 Oye Son 17 Son 18 Bomba 19 Tradit Rhumba 20 Acoustic Rhumba 21 Arg Tango 22 Salsa 23 Plena 24 Mariachi 25 Tradit Cumbia 26 Calypso 27 Limborock
BOSSA/SAMBA 01 Organ Bossa 02 Organ Samba 03 Orchestral Bossa 04 Jazz Bossa 05 Sunshine Bossa 06 Sweet Bossa 07 Club Bossa 08 Orchestral Samba 09 Acoustic Samba 10 Brazilian Samba 11 Sambalegre 12 Guitar Samba 13 Night Bossa 14 Fast Bossa 15 Guitar Bossa 16 Latin Fusion 17 Piano Latin 18 Jazz Latin
TRADIT WORLD 01 2000's Bolero 02 Country Flyer 03 Pop Gospel 04 Gospel Shuffle 05 Western Movie 06 Epic Movie 07 Holiday 1 08 Holiday 2 09 Holiday 3 10 French Java 11 Irish 12 Southern Twang 13 SteamtrainCountr 14 Posaunenpolka 15 German Polka 16 Schlagerwalzer 17 Posaunenwalzer 18 Orchestr Sl Fox 19 Pop Fox 20 Nice Fox 21 Fox Band 22 Slow Country 23 Country Ballad 24 Country Rock 25 Country Beat 26 Easy Country 27 Country Fox 28 Country Pop 29 Slow Polka 30 Austrian Polka 31 Austrian Waltz 32 Simple Sl Waltz 33 Orch Sl Waltz 34 Classic W'Waltz 35 Classic
61 1 38 6 38 9 24 7 24 9 59 6 59 4 45 1 45 2 25 9 23 6 23 12 26 6 25 7 38 10 17 27 46 2 35 4 35 3
CC00 CC32
22 46 27 25 70 2 22 44 70 1 22 15 22 16 27 24 27 23 27 9 27 10 27 12 22 17 22 18 22 28 22 26 22 27 22 19
CC00 CC32
55 3 16 26 44 33 44 34
438 437
19 30
550 12 39 17 52 67 3 19 32 16 25 19 31 19 29 17 51 17 50 50 84 50 86 50 83 50 87 16 20 16 19 16 15 16 16 16 17 50 82 50 85 19 28 19 27 17 47 18 10 18 11 17 24
540
89
Page 90
Backing Module BK-7m
Music Style list
36 6_8 March 37 US March 38 Orchestral Polka 39 Foxtrot 40 Beguine 41 Reggae 42 Island 43 Piano Waltz 44 Guitar Waltz 45 Country Swing 46 Orchestral Waltz
20 11 20 10 19 9 34 7 39 16
88
810 18 12 18 13 16 18 17 48

Style division program change numbers

The following program change numbers allow you to select the desired Music Style division via MIDI. These messages need to be transmitted on the BK-7m’s Style channel (see “Style—Rx Channel” on p. 70).
If you also need to select a differ­ent Music Style, be sure to insert the corrseponding CC00 and CC32 bank select values (see “Music Style list” on p. 88) before one of the program changes numbers shown below.
Music Style Divisions Intro1 Intro2 Intro3 Intro4 Main 1 Main 2 Main 3 Main 4 Fill Down1 Fill Down2 Fill Down3 Fill Up1 Fill Up2 Fill Up3 Ending1 Ending2 Ending3 Ending4
PC 67 68 65 66 01 02 09 10 89
100
90 97 99 98 75 76 73 74
Recalling a Performance mem­ory from the loaded Perfor­mance List via MIDI
The following bank select and pro­gram change messages allow you to select the desired Performance memory from the loaded Perfor­mance List. These MIDI messages must be received on the BK-7m’s Basic channel.
Basic structure
CC00 122 (Fixed value)
CC32 0~7 (Page value)
PC 1~128 (Value)
Here is how to calculate which values to assign to the CC00, CC32 and PC messages:
CC00 122 (Fixed)
CC32 (Performance memory
number – 1) / 128
PC Performance memory num-
ber – (CC32 x 128)
For example, to recall Performance memory number 280, you will need to transmit:
CC00 122
CC32 (280 – 1) / 128 = 2
PC 280 – (2 x 128) = 24
Note: Be aware that the BK-7m transmits its Performance memory addresses based on the system shown above.
E-Series Compatibility
Music Style Divisions Intro Fill in To Original Fill in To Variation Ending Break Mute
r
90
PC 83 82 81 84 85
Page 91
20. Tone List
Backing Module BK-7m
r

Tone List

Piano NaturalPiano SuperiorPian ClassicPiano UprightPiano Brite Piano Piano+String Piano+Choir StackedPiano Honky-tonk 1 RD Piano 1 Rock Piano Dance Piano Mild Piano MonoAcPiano European Pf RD Piano 1 w Honky-tonk 2 EP – Keyboard Vintage EP1 Pro Stage Phase EP Vintage EP2 Stage FM EPiano1 FM EPiano2 Wurly Clav. 1 Harpsichord1 Tremolo EP MIDI EPiano1 MIDI EPiano2 FM+SA EP St.FM EP EP Legend EP Phase Dist E.Piano Phase Clav JP8000 Clav. St.Soft EP E.Piano 1 E.Piano 2 Hard FM EP Cho. E.Piano EP Heaven Reso Clav. Coupled Hps. Clav. 2 Analog Clav. Harpsichord2 Harpsi.w Chr Perc Vibraphone Marimba w Glockenspiel Celesta Pop Celesta Music Box 1 Carillon Pop Vibe. Tubular-bell Vibraphone w Music Box 2 Xylophone w Church Bell Balafon Organ B3 Sermon Blues Perc All Skate! R&B B3
CC00 CC32 PC
040
47 4 0
041 140
141 24 4 0 26 4 0 47 4 2
043
042
241 80 4 1
240 45 4 0 16 4 0
842
843
CC00 CC32 PC
81 4 4 47 4 4 44 4 4 82 4 4 80 4 4 80 4 5 81 4 5 24 4 4
147
246 46 4 4
142
242 16 4 4 16 4 5 10 4 5 32 4 5 17 4 4 17 4 7 38 4 7
844
044
045 24 4 5
944 44 4 88 16 4 7
846
047 32 4 7 24 4 6
046
CC00 CC32 PC
0411
0412
049
048
148
0410
9414
1411
0414
8411
1410
0413
8414 17 4 12
CC00 CC32 PC
12 4 16 80 4 17 82 4 17 83 4 17
HeavyTraffic Organ 3 Stevie's B3 Church Org.1 Organ Flute Theater Org. Dyno Rotary Hang Twice Felix Ballad XV Organ B3 Has Come Org Jazz1 /9 Church Org.2 Reed Organ Head Up B3 Organ 1 Ful Organ 1 60's Organ Jazz Organ 1 Perc.Organ 1 Rock Organ Rotary Org.S Rotary Org.F Church Org.3 Rotary Organ L-Organ Organ 2 Ful Organ 2 Jazz Organ 2 Perc.Organ 2 Chorus Or Mellow 1 Cheese Organ JazzOrgan RD Ful Organ 3 Jazz Organ 3 Perc.Organ 3 Fire Perc Organ 101 Br.Ballad B3 JX8 Organ D-50 Organ VS Organ Trem. Organ E.Organ 16+2 Organ Bass Ful Organ 4 Jazz Organ 4 Puff Organ Hybrid Organ Full Perc 70's E.Organ Farf Organ Orient.Org.1 Orient.Org.2 Accordion Acc. Master Acc. Classic Italian Folk Fr. Musette Steierische Bandoneon 1 Bandoneon 2 Bandoneon 3 Mellow Harm Hand Harm. Accordion It Accordion Fr B.Harp Basic B.Harp Suppl
CC00 CC32 PC
81418
0418
82416
0419 24419 33419 82418 85417 84417 80418 88417 83418
8419
0420 80416
0416
2416 16416
1417 32417 17418 16418 24418 16419
8418 47418
0417
3416
3417 33417
8417 83416 24416 81417
4416
4417 34417 86417
1416 81416 30416 25416 28416
8416
2417 40416 10416
5417 16420 27416 87417 32416 19416
116 4 16 116 4 20
CC00 CC32 PC
50421 51421 52421 53421 54421
8423
0423 52423
0422 51422
8421
0421
8422
9422
Soft Accord Accordion 1 Accordion 2 JV.Accordion OrientalAcc1 OrientalAcc2 OrientalAcc3 OrientalAcc4 A. Guitar Nylon Gt.1 Nylon-str.Gt Steel.Gt2 Steel.Gt4 Ac.Guitar1 2_Guitars 12 Strings Nylon+Steel2 MandolinTrem Banjo Nylon Gt.2 Nylon+Steel1 Steel.Gt5 Ac.Guitar2 Steel.Gt1 Steel.Gt3 12Stringsoft Requint Gt.2 Mandolin Tr. Muted Banjo Nylon Gt.o Ac.Gtr.Hrm Steel + Body Atmosphere HollowReleas Nylon Harp Steel.Gt6 Ac.Guitar3 Mandolin Fl.Gtr 1 Fl.Gtr 2 Fl.GtrRoll Steel-str.Gt Requint Gt.1 Nylon+Steel3 Ukulele Velo Harmnix Gt.FretNoise Atk Steel Gt E. Guitar – Bass Clean Solid Warm Drive Distortion Clean Mute Jazz Guitar1 Ulti Ac Bass Picked Bass1 Fingered Bs1 Nu Slap Bs RubberBass 2 Clean Elect. Clean El Oct Dynamic Mute JC ChrusGt Jazz Guitar2 XV Ac.Bass Fretless Bs1 Mute Bass Finger Slap Slap Pop Overdrive3
CC00 CC32 PC
25 4 21 64 4 21 16 4 21 69 4 21 65 4 21 66 4 21 67 4 21 68 4 21
CC00 CC32 PC
64 4 24
0424 64 4 25 69 4 25 48 4 25 66 4 25
8425 67 4 25 18 4 25
04105 32 4 24
9425 70 4 25 49 4 25 52 4 25 65 4 25
7425 52 4 24 18 2 25
14105 16 4 24 51 4 25 33 4 25
0499
4499
2499 32 4 25 50 4 25 16 4 25 48 4 24 49 4 24 51 4 24
0425 40 4 24 68 4 25
8424 24 4 24
04120 10 4 25
CC00 CC32 PC
69 4 27 65 4 29 64 4 30 67 4 28 62 4 26
0432
0434
0433
0436 16 4 39 64 4 27 65 4 27 66 4 27
9427 80 4 26
9432
0435 84 4 32
1433
1436 64 4 29
91
Page 92
Backing Module BK-7m
Tone List
Distort Gt1 Dist. Mute Muted Over PedalSteel 5String Bs Picked Bass2 Slap Bass 1 XV Bass+Ride Drum'n'Bass Distort Gt2 LP OverDrv RockRhythm2 Muted Gt. 2 Jazz Gt. Picked Bass3 Slap Bass 2 Jazz Bass 1 Synth Bass 2 Picked Bass4 RockRhythm1 Muted Gt. 3 TC MutedGt TC Clean JGuitar Scat Reso Slap Bass Invader Jazz Bass 2 Rock Bass Fretless Bs2 Power Gt.2 Power Gt.3 Distort Gt3 Dist Rtm GTR Muted Gt. 1 TB Saw Bass MG Bass Modular Bass Seq Bass 1 SynthBass201 LP HalfDrv2 Mid Tone GTR Clean Gt. JC CleanGt Mellow Gt. RubberBass 1 u/i/e/o V/Sw VocoBass Heart Bass Raver Bass 1 LP RearAtk Clean Half OpenHard 1 OpenHard 2 TC RearPk Guitaron Raver Bass 2 MG Blip Bs SH101 Bass 1 JP-8 Bass Chorus Gt TC Cln ff AtkCleanGt Funk Pop LP Rear Chung Ruan WireStr Bass MG Oct Bass2 SH101 Bass 2 Smooth Bass Overdrv Gt Overdrive1 Overdrive2 More Drive Dist.Fast AcBass 1
CC00 CC32 PC
3430 64 4 28 68 4 28
8426 83 4 32
1434
0437 16 4 32 82 4 38
1430
9429 25 4 30 65 4 28
0426
2434
1437
2433
0439
3434 24 4 30 66 4 28
2428 19 4 27 81 4 26
8436 80 4 39
3433
4433
1435 65 4 30 66 4 30
0430 26 4 30
0428 81 4 38
4439
2439
3439
1439 11 4 29 23 4 27
0427
4427
1426 13 4 39 84 4 39 83 4 39
5433 81 4 39 22 4 27
1427
2427
3427 17 4 27 48 4 32 82 4 39
7439 17 4 39
4438
8427 18 4 27
5427
8428 21 4 27 24 4 27 11 4 39
6439 18 4 39 19 4 39
0429
1429
2429
3429
4430 45 4 32
r
AcBass 2 AcBass 3 SH101 Bass 3 RND Bass Dazed Gtr Attack Dist LP Rear Pk LP HalfDrv LP Chorus Rockabilly AcousticBs Bubble Bass Sync Bass 1 Spike Bass Power Gt.1 TCFrntPick Funk Gt. Dance Dst.Gt Pulse Mix Bs Seq Bass 2 3rd Bass MG Oct Bass1 Mild Bass Gt.Feedback2 Gt.Feedback1 Gt.Harmonics Ac.Gt.Harmnx Gt.Cut Noise MG LightBass DistSynBass DistEnvBass LightSynBass PopSynthBass Pick Scrape Sync Bass 2 SH101 Bass 4 TeeBee V/Sw Odd Bass 303Sqr.Rev X Wire Bass Bassic Needs Fretless Bs3 Beef FM Bass Muted PickBs Wood+FlessBs Fretless Bs4 Double Pick Mr.Smooth String Slap E.Bass Harm. SynthBass101 Synth Bass 1 JP-4 Bass CS Bass Tekno Bass Reso SH Bass Rubber303 Bs TB303 Bass TB303 DistBs TB303 Sqr Bs Clavi Bass Jungle Bass Square Bass Wild Ac.Bs Baby Bass AttackFinger Arpeggio Bs AtkSineBass OB sine Bass 303SqDistBs Echo SynBass Bass Slide1 Bass Slide2 DoubleSlide
CC00 CC32 PC
46432 47432 20439 26439
2430
5430 20427 10429 12429
1432 49432 28439 24439 21439 16430 16427 16428 11484 31439 33439 34439 35439 37439
9431
8430
0431 16431
14120 39439 40439 38439 45439 46439
64120 30439 47439 44438 15439 43438 10439 83438
2435
8439
8434
8435
3435
4434
5435
24120 24431
1438
0438
3438
2438 10438 16438 14438
9438 18438 17438 19438 21438 22438
8432 48433
6433 24438 34438 35438 41438
74102
54120 47 4 120 48 4 120
Strings St.Strings 1 St.Slow Str1 JP8 Strings1 Warm Strings Bright Str.3 Orchestra 1 X Violin Harp St.Pizzicato OrchestraHit SlowStrings1 Strings Syn.Strings1 Syn.Strings2 Contrabass Folk Violin Viola Timpani St.Strings 2 Oct Strings1 St.Slow Str2 SlowStrings2 Syn.Strings5 ChamberStr Str.+Flute Strings+Horn FolkViolinVb St.Strings 3 SlowStrings3 JP8 Strings2 Air Strings Orchestra 2 Slow Violin Slow Tremolo Cello ContraBsSect Cello sect. Syn.Strings4 StraightStr. JP Saw Str. Orchestra 3 Violin Atk Trem Str.St. PizzicatoStr Tremolo Orch Oct Strings2 FilteredOrch S.Str+Choir JP Strings OB Strings Bright Str.2 Syn.Strings3 Bright Str.1 Harp&Strings SuspenseStr Legato Str. Velo Strings Viola Attack Cello Attack Strings Oct Vcs&Cbs Pizz Solo Pizz. Solo Spic. StringsSpic. Harp St. Uillean Harp Synth Harp Choir Str. Mild Strings 60s Strings High Strings Tron Strings Noiz Strings JUNO Strings DistStrings
CC00 CC32 PC
16 4 48 10 4 49 81 4 50
9449 5448 9448
80 4 40
0446 3445 0455 0449 0448 0450 0451 0443
116 4 40
0441
0447 17 4 48 32 4 48 11 4 49
1449 10 4 50
2448 13 4 48 12 4 48
116 4 39
18 4 48
2449 80 4 50
8451
8448
8440
8444
0442 34 4 48
3448
9450 10 4 51
4451 20 4 48
0440
0444
0445 10 4 48 33 4 48
3451 12 4 49
3450
1450
4448
8450
1448
1446
9444
8449 24 4 48
1441
1442
116 4 10
1445
8445 16 4 45 17 4 45
2446
8446 16 4 46 11 4 48
7448 40 4 48 16 4 50 24 4 50 25 4 50
2451
6451
92
Page 93
Backing Module BK-7m
r
Tone List
Vocal Warm Voices Syn Vox Pad Fem Mm Srt Rich Choir 1 St.ChoirAahs Vox Pad Jazz Scat Choir Aahs Melted Chr ChorusLahs ChorusAahs Harpvox Voice Oohs Choir Hahs LFO Vox St.BoysChoir VoiceAah Mal Itopia Humming Silent Night Melted Choir Holy Voices Solo Vox JzVoiceBap JzVoiceDow Voice Dahs JzVox Thum JzVoiceDat Vox Sweep SynVox SC Heaven JX8P Vox Syn.Voice 1 Syn.Voice 2 Tears Voices VP330 Choir Chorus Oohs2 Space Voice Heaven II Water Space Cosmic Voice Vocorderman Horror Pad Breath&Rise Chorus Oohs1 VoiceLah Fem ChorusLahFem ChorusLuhFem VoiceUuh Fem Fem Lah&Lan Brass N.Trombone* Ac.Brass Brass Sforz. 2Tps+Tb Henry IV Tuba 1 French Horns Jump Brass Africa Brass St.Orch Brs1 Octave Brass FatPop Brass Trombone 1 Tuba 2 Tuba + Horn Warm Brass MG Brass fst MKS Brass St. Brass ff Horn + Orche Tuba 3 Fr.Horn Trombone 2 JUNO Brass
CC00 CC32 PC
82 4 94
0454 82 4 53 14 4 52
8452 83 4 94
6453
0452 33 4 52 24 4 52 32 4 52
3499 48 4 53 16 4 52
9485 13 4 52 36 4 53
3491 40 4 53
9454
9452 12 4 91
0485 10 4 53 11 4 53
8453 12 4 53
9453
2494
1454
2491 18 4 54
8454 10 4 54 12 4 94 16 4 54
3453
0491
1491
4491
8491 11 4 91
8494 11 4 94
0453 16 4 53 17 4 53 19 4 53 23 4 53 24 4 53
CC00 CC32 PC
89 64 57 80 4 61 81 4 61 43 4 61 47 4 63
0458
0460
5462 80 4 63 36 4 61 24 4 61 14 4 61
0457
1458
8458
2463 81 4 63
4462
3461
2460 47 4 58
1460
1457
1462
Fat SynBrass Poly Brass PowerBrass Bright Tb V Twin bones Polka Tuba Bs.Trombone Synth Brass Dual Horns Pro Brass Orch Brass St.Orch Brs2 Brass + Reed Folk Tuba P5 Brass Brass 1 2Tps+Tb+Sax Brass 2 Brass 3 Fat + Reed F.Horn Rip Brass sfz 1 OB Brass Sync Brass Oct SynBrass Euphonium Bones Sect. Quad Brass2 SH-5 Brass Brass sfz 2 Brass Fall Brass Oct Wide FreHrns F.Hrn Slow Velo Brass 1 SoaringHorns Quad Brass1 DeepSynBrass Sax – Trumpet N.Tenor Sax* Tenor Sax Baritone Sax Bari & Tenor MuteTrumpet1 FlugelHorn Trumpet BlowAltoVib AltoSax Soft Muted Tp 1 Romantc Tp Trumpet2 Rom/Mar Tp FolkTrumpVb Soprano Exp. Blowed Tenor St.Tenor Sax MariachiTp Bright Tp. Grow Sax Folk A.Sax Soprano Sax2 Folk A.SaxVb Latin Tenor Muted Tp 2 Tp Mar/Shk Trumpet & Nz MuteTrumpet2 TrumpetFall2 Super Tenor Oriental SAX AltoSax Exp. TenorSaxFst BreathyTn. Warm Tp.1 Dark Trumpet
CC00 CC32 PC
5463 80462 47461
4457
2457 46458
8457
0462
9460
8462 33461 38461 25461 45458
0463
0461 44461
8461
9461 26461 24460 10461
9463
4463 16462 16457
2461
5461
3462 12461 16461
116 4 41
3460
8460 16463 46463
4461
6463
CC00 CC32 PC
89 64 66
0466
0467
8467
0459
8456
0456 50465 46465 48459 49456 48456 51456 18256
8464 46466
9466 50456 24456
9465 17265
0464 18265 44466 49459 52456
4456
2459 17461 47466
116 4 65
8465 50466
8466 25456
3456
Tp Shake Atk Trumpet FolkTrumpet FolkAlto Tenor Sax 1 Sax Section AltoSax + Tp Alto Sax MuteTrumpet3 Muted Horns Twin Tp. Warm Tp.2 Wind FluteVibAtk JazzClariVib FolkClarinet Oboe Piccolo 1 Bassoon BottleBlow1 Whistle 1 Pan Flute1 English Horn FlTraverso SoftClarinet FolkClarinVb Oboe Exp. BottleBlow2 Bs Clarinet Whistle 2 Pan Flute2 Multi Wind Flute Exp Clarinet Folk Clarin Quad Wind Recorder The Bottle Ocarina TinWhistle2 Pipe & Reed Flute 1 Flute 2 Tron Flute Synth Big Lead Unison Saws OB Saw LM Square CC Solo Poly Saws 80's PolySyn Super Poly D-50 Fantasy Twin Sine Dual Sqr&Saw Velo Lead MG Square Hollow Mini Polysynth 1 X-hale Phenomena Poly Key Saw Wave Unison SawLd MG SawLead 2 TB Lead Fat GR Lead Brightness Bell Heaven New Age Pad Syn.Calliope OB Stab Big & Raw P5 Sync Lead
CC00 CC32 PC
53 4 56 47 4 56
1456 51 4 65 45 4 66 17 4 65 16 4 65
0465
3459
8459 27 4 56 26 4 56
CC00 CC32 PC
52 4 73 50 4 71 51 4 71
0468
0472
0470
0476
0478
0475
0469
3473 52 4 71 17 2 71
8468 47 4 76
8471
1478 47 4 75 16 4 71
2473
0471 16 2 71 17 4 71
0474 46 4 76
0479 46 4 75
9473
0473
1473 51 4 73
CC00 CC32 PC
4481 46 4 90 26 4 81
6480
4480 83 4 90
1490
4490 43 4 88 11 4 80 23 4 80
5481
1480
2480
0490 81 4 94 80 4 86 82 4 90
0481
7483 39 4 81
1483
3484
04100
3488
2488
0482
24100
1487 16 4 84
93
Page 94
Backing Module BK-7m
Tone List
Acid Guitar D-50 Fat Saw Euro-Dance 2 Polysynth 2 LowBirds Pad D-50 Retour Fantasia 1 OB DoubleSaw Rock Lead Techno Saw JP DoubleSaw JP SuperSaw CS Saw MG Saw Lead Ice Rain Oct Saw Lead Chiffer Lead LM Pure Lead Big Blue Vibra Bells JUNO Rave LA Brass Ld Big Fives Goblin SequenceSaw3 Octave Stack Euro-Dance 1 Crispy Lead LM Blow Lead Xpressive 7th Atmos. Galaxy Way Rising OSC. Noise Peaker Raver Blade Etherality Reso Stack Techno Stack TwinOct.Rave Happy Synth ForwardSweep ReverseSweep Minor Rave SuperSaws Bamboo Hit AuhAuh Square Wave Mellow FM Shmoog 2600 Sine KG Lead OB Square JP-8 Square Dist Square 303SquarDst1 303SquarDst2 Pulse Lead JP8 PulseLd1 JP8 PulseLd2 260RingLead 303DistLead JP8000DistLd HipHop Sq Flux Pulse Pulse Saw GR-300 Saw LA Saw Doctor Solo Fat Saw Lead Saw Impulse Strange Str. FatSawLead Waspy Synth PM Lead MG Saw
CC00 CC32 PC
10 4 84 11 4 81 81 4 87
2490 84101 54100
0488 12 4 81 18 4 84 47 4 81 13 4 81 15 4 81 30 4 81 31 4 81
0496 35 4 81
0483
8482 29 4 101
8498
3487 22 4 84
1486
04101 46 4 81
9490 80 4 87 84 4 87
9482 83 4 87 17 4 103 18 4 103 19 4 103
6491 82 4 87
54103 10 4 90 11 4 90 13 4 90 15 4 90 16 4 90 17 4 90 24 4 90 47 4 90
7491 10 4 91
0480
3480
5480
8480 10 4 80 17 4 80 18 4 80 19 4 80 20 4 80 21 4 80 24 4 80 26 4 80 28 4 80 29 4 80 30 4 80 31 4 80 33 4 80 35 4 80
2481
6481
7481
8481
9481
5496
6496 14 4 81 16 4 81 17 4 81 24 4 81
r
Crystal Syn Mallet P5 Saw Lead Soft Crystal Round Glock Loud Glock Natural Lead Synchronized SequenceSaw1 Digi Bells SequenceSaw2 Reso Saw Cheese Saw Blow Bell Choral Bells Air Bells Bell Harp Gamelimba Bottom Bell Warm Atmos FatSolo Lead ForcefulLead Oct.UnisonLd Mad Lead Vaporish CrowdingLead Space Org X Double Sqr. Chord maj7th PureFlatLead Short Chord Charang Wire Lead ShortCircuit FB.Charang Brass Star Mellow GR Ld Org Bell Goblinson 50's Sci-Fi Abduction Fat SyncLead Auhbient 5th DecaSync LFO Pad Random Str Dirty Sync DualSyncLead UFO FX 5th Saw Wave FallinInsect LFO Oct.Rave 5th Lead Just Before RandomEnding JP 5th Saw Random Sine JP8000 5thFB Noise&SawHit Bass & Lead Fat & Perky DancingDrill Dirty Stack Static Hit Delayed Lead Acid Copter Fantasia 2 Fantasia 3 Fantasia 4 260HarmPad Music Bell Pad – Ethnic Pad With LA Warm Pad Attack! Pad
CC00 CC32 PC
0498 1498
33481
2498 3498
4498 36481 38481 40481
9498 41481 42481 43481 12498 16498 17498 18498 19498 23498
1499
4483
5483
6483
8483 80490
9483 81486 10483 82486 47483 83486
0484
1484 80455
2484
34100
5484
84100
14101
24101
34101 17484
44101 19484
54101
64101 20484 21484 14 4 101
0486 18 4 101 19 4 101
2486 20 4 101 22 4 101
5486 23 4 101
6486 25 4 101
0487
2487 27 4 101 28 4 101 30 4 101
7487 32 4 101
1488
4488
5488
7488 10498
CC00 CC32 PC
81489 82489 83489
Human Pad OB Soft Pad Sitar 1 NAY 1 Shakuhachi Oud 1 Kawala 1 JP8 Hollow JP Soft Pad Warm Squ Pad Warm JP STR Square Pad Tambra Rabab Shamisen Kalimba Sanza Stacked Pad Warm Pad Thick Matrix Big Panner Reso Panner Bagpipe Gopichant UillnPipe Or Fiddle Pungi Sine Pad Tamboura Echo Drops Rotary Strng Stack Pad Bozouki Mizmar 1 Uillean Pipe Sitar 2 Kanoun3 TrmV Soundtrack JP8Haunting Metal Pad Silky Pad 1 Echo Pan 1 Kawala 2 Di KanounStereo Zither Hichiriki Octave Pad Sync Brs.Pad Silky Pad 2 Star Dust Mystic Pad Pi Pa Sitar/Drone Sitar 3 Tsugaru San Xian Anklung Pad Tine Pad Hols Strings Oct.PWM Pad PWM Soft Pad Koto TinWhistle1 Syn Shamisen TinWhtsle Nm Gu Zheng LFO Sweep Ambient Pad Saw Strings JP8 Sqr Pad SoftBellPad Taisho Koto Kanoon Bodhran Bodhran Mute
10 4 89
6489 04104 8472 0477
24 4 105
8475 44 4 91 13 4 89 46 4 91 47 4 89 45 4 91
84104
84105
04106
04108
84108 45 4 89
0489
1489
44102
54102
04109 16 4 105 11 4 109
04110
84111
5489 16 4 104
04102
3489
9489 24 4 25 24 4 111
94109
14104 60 4 107
0497 43 4 91
0493
94103
24102
9475 16 4 72 53 4 107 16 4 15 16 4 111
8489 11 4 89 11 4 103
34103
64103 32 4 105
44104
54104
14106
94105
3496
1493
4497 12 4 89 43 4 89
04107 24 4 75
84106 25 4 75
14107 44 4 89
6499 46 4 89
2492
1492
84107 16 4 107
94108 10 4 108
94
Page 95
Backing Module BK-7m
r
Tone List
Didgeridoo Panner Pad Bowed Glass Special Rave Halo Pad Sweep Pad Oud1 Tremolo Oud+Strings Kanoon+Choir Oct Harp ShakuBamboo Ambient BPF Converge Warriors Shwimmer Celestial Pd UillnPipe Nm Er Hu Gao Hu Shanai 1 Shanai 2 Sweep Stack Sweep Pipe SawsSweep Stray Pad Clavi Pad Suona 1 Suona 2 Tinkle Bell Gender Pemade EP Pad CP Pad Ancestral Prologue 1 Prologue 2 Yang Qin Santur Cimbalom Dulcimer Kanoun 3 St HistoryWave Echo Pan 2 Pan Sequence Star Theme Echo Bell Kanoun1 TrmV Kanoun2 TrmV Kanoun 1 Kanoun 2 Kanoun 3 Panning Lead D-Mention Kanoun Trm Kanoun 3 Oct Kanoun Oct. Kawala Oct. Kawala Oct.V Bozouki Trm Bozouki TrmV Rababa Oud 2 Oud 3 Oud2 Tremolo Oud1Trm VMix Oud2Trm VMix Oud Oct. NAY 2 NAY Oct. NAY Oct.VMix Mizmar Trm Mizmar 2 Mizmar Oct Mizmar Trm V Mizmar Dual
CC00 CC32 PC
84109 2493 0492 4493 0494
0495 40 4 105 28 4 105 19 4 107 24 4 107 47 4 77
2495
8495
4495
9495 10 4 95 10 4 109
84110
94110
04111
14111 13 4 95 12 4 95 47 4 95 15 4 95
8496 32 4 111 33 4 111
04112
94112 15 4 112
9496 11 4 96
1497
2497
3497 24 4 46
0415
8415 24 4 15 54 4 107
5497
34102
84102
04103
14102 58 4 107 59 4 107 50 4 107 51 4 107 52 4 107 10 4 102 80 4 94 57 4 107 56 4 107 55 4 107 10 4 75 11 4 75 25 4 25 26 4 25 10 4 110 25 4 105 26 4 105 41 4 105 42 4 105 43 4 105 27 4 105 10 4 72 11 4 72 12 4 72 28 4 111 25 4 111 27 4 111 29 4 111 26 4 111
Arghool Percuss – SFX Reverse Cym. Woodblock Taiko Agogo Steel Drums Gun Shot Telephone 1 Car-Stop Helicopter Seashore Sine Perc. Fl.Key Click Cymbal Roll Elec Perc Horse-Gallop Dog Bird 1 Growl 1 Kitty Jazz Tom 808 Tom Melo. Tom 1 Breath Noise Small Club Explosion Car-Engine Seal Rain Thunder Wind 1 Stream Melo. Tom 2 Jungle SD Bubble Wind 2 Bird 2 DoorCreaking Siren Train Jetplane Starship Burst Noise Synth Drum Car-Pass Door Telephone 2 Cricket Rev.Snare Rev.ConBD Rev.Kick 1 White Noise Winds Hit Pink Noise Scratch 1 TapeRewind Growl 2 Rev.Tom Trumpet Nz Fancy Animal Scratch 2 ScratchKey Phono Noise MC-500 Beep HandClapMenu 909 HandClap Finger Snaps Voice ComeOn Car-Crash Calculating Concert BD Wind Chimes Voice One Voice Two
CC00 CC32 PC
32472
CC00 CC32 PC
04119 04115 04116 04113 04114 04127 04124 24125 04125 04122
10 4 118
14121
47 4 112
94118 24123 14123 04123 54123 44123 34117 84118 04117 04121 74126 34127 14125 84123 14122 24122 34122 44122 84117
18 4 117
54122 64122 34123 24124 54125 64125 74125 84125 94125 04118 34125 34124 14124 74122
84119 17 4 119 16 4 119 17 4 122 47 4 122 16 4 122
44124
94124
64123 25 4 119
94121
74123
74124
84124 10 4 124 11 4 124 40 4 115 32 4 115 24 4 115 23 4 126
44125 10 4 125
84116
54124 16 4 126 17 4 126
Voice Three Voice Tah Castanets Tambourine Perc. Bang Burner Glass & Glam Ice Ring Crack Bottle Kajar Small Taiko Voice Aou Voice Oou Voice Hie Pour Bottle Open CD Tray Audio Switch Bounce Key Typing SL 1 SL 2 Kelontuk Sid Car Engine Car Horn Boeeeen R.Crossing Compresser Sword Boom! Sword Cross Stab! 1 Stab! 2 Applause 1 Laughing Screaming Punch Atarigane Heart Beat Footsteps Applause 2 ApplauseWave Angklung BabyLaughing Voice Whey Voice Kikit Machine Gun Lasergun Bebarongan Dholak Eruption Big Shot Clap Hit Stack Hit Double Hit Industry Hit Strings Hit Technorg Hit Rave Hit Bit Hit Bam Hit Philly Hit Dist. Hit Impact Hit Euro Hit Bass Hit 6th Hit Techno Hit Lo Fi Rave Perc. Hit Shock Wave
(*): These are SuperNATURAL Tones.
CC00 CC32 PC
18 4 126 19 4 126
84115 16 4 113 11 4 125 12 4 125 13 4 125 14 4 125 16 4 125 17 4 112
14116 24 4 126 25 4 126 26 4 126 17 4 125 19 4 125 20 4 125 18 4 116 21 4 125 22 4 125 23 4 125 20 4 112 24 4 125 25 4 125 26 4 125 27 4 125 28 4 125 29 4 125 30 4 125 31 4 125 32 4 125
04126
14126
24126
34126
84113
44126
54126
64126
84126 16 4 115
94126 20 4 126 22 4 126
14127
24127 25 4 116 27 4 116
44127
54127 27 4 55 25 4 55 10 4 55 26 4 55 24 4 55 22 4 55 23 4 55 20 4 55 19 4 55
9455 18 4 55
8455
3455
1455
2455 17 4 55 16 4 55 11 4 55 12 4 55
95
Page 96
Backing Module BK-7m

Drum Sets

21. Drum Sets
C–1 0
C0 12
C1 24
C2 36
C3 48
C4 60
C5 72
C6 84
C7 96
PC: 1 [CC32: 4] STANDARD 1
Std.1 Kick1 Std.1 Kick2
1
Std.2 Kick1
2
3
Std2 Kick2
4
Kick 1 Kick 2
5
Jazz Kick 1
6
Jazz Kick 2
7
8
Room Kick 1
9
Room Kick 2
10
Power Kick1
11
Power Kick2 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1
13
TR-808 Kick
14
15
TR-909 Kick
16
Dance Kick 2 Voice One
17
Voice Two
18
Voice Three
19
20
85Rm BsDrum1
21
85Rm BsDrum2
22
MC-500 Beep
23
MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll
25
FingerSnaps2
26
27
High-Q
28
Slap ScratchPush
29
ScratchPull
30
Sticks
31
32
SquareClick
33
Mtrnm.Click
34
Mtrnm. Bell
35
85St BsDrum1 85St BsDrum2 Side Stick
37
85St Snare2
38
39
909 HandClap
40
85St Snare1 Real Tom 6
41
Close HiHat2
42
Real Tom 6
43
44
Pedal HiHat2
45
Real Tom 4
46
Open HiHat2
47
Real Tom 4 Real Tom 1 Crash Cym.1
49
Real Tom 1
50
51
Ride Cymbal
52
ChinaCymbal Ride Bell
53
Tambourine
54
Splash Cym.
55
56
Cowbell
57
Crash Cym.2
58
Vibraslap
59
Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo
61
Mute H.Conga
62
63
Conga Hi Opn
64
Conga Lo Opn High Timbale
65
Low Timbale
66
Agogo
67
68
Agogo
69
Cabasa
70
Maracas
71
ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro
73
Long Guiro
74
75
Claves
76
Woodblock Woodblock
77
Mute Cuica
78
Open Cuica
79
80
MuteTriangl
81
OpenTriangl
82
Shaker
83
Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets
85
Mute Surdo
86
87
Open Surdo
88
Applause 2
---
89
---
90
---
91
92
---
93
---
94
---
95
82Rm Snare2 82Rm Snare1
PC: 2 [CC32: 4] STANDARD 2
Std.1 Kick1 Std.1 Kick2 Std.2 Kick1 Std2 Kick2 Kick 1 Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 Room Kick 1 Room Kick 2 Power Kick1 Power Kick2 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 TR-808 Kick TR-909 Kick Dance Kick 2 Voice One Voice Two Voice Three
---
--­MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll Finger Snap High-Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell Std2 Kick2 Std.2 Kick1 Side Stick Std.2 Snare1 808clap Std.2 Snare2 Real Tom 6 Jazz Clsd.HH Real Tom 6 Pedal HiHat Real Tom 4 Jazz Open HH Real Tom 4 Real Tom 1 Crash Cym.1 Real Tom 1 Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym. Cowbell Crash Cym.2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H.Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bar Chimes Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause 2
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
PC: 3 [CC32: 4] STANDARD L/R
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
--­Voice One Voice Two Voice Three
---
--­MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High-Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell 85St BsDrum1 85St BsDrum2 Side Stick 85St Snare2 909 HandClap 85St Snare1 Real Tom 6 82StClsHatB Real Tom 6 Pedal HiHat2 Real Tom 4 82StOpenHatB Real Tom 4 Real Tom 1 Crash1c B Real Tom 1 Ride__c B ChinaCymbal Ridbl_c B Tambourine Splash Cym. Cowbell Crash Cym.2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H.Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause 2
---
---
---
---
---
--­85St BsDrum1 85St BsDrum2
PC: 7 [CC32: 4] V-Pop1
HipHop BD1 Jazz Kick 1 Mex_Kik36 85Rm BsDrum1 85Rm BsDrum2 HipHop BD2 Techno BD1 JungleBD Set HipHop BD1 909 Comp BD 85St BsDrum1 NewJzKik NewRockKik Cymbal Roll NewRkCStk_2 82Rm Snare1 82Rm Snare2 85St Snare1 85St Snare2 NewJzSn2 NewJzSn1 NewR&BSn NewRockSn2_2 NewRockSn1_2 IPopSn38_2 IPopGstS39_2 IPopSn38_2 FingerSnaps2 909 HandClap 808clap Hand clap2 909 HandClap IPopPHat32 GospelHClp1 IPopSRll30_1 IPopKik35 IPopKik36 IPopCStk37_1 IPopSn38_1 IPopGstS39_1 IPopSn40_1 IPopTomLFl41 IPopHat1_42 IPopTomL43 IPopHat2_44 IPopTomMFl45 IPopHat3_46 IPopTomM47 IPopTomHFl48 IPopCyml2_52 IPopTomH50 IPopRd1_51 IPopCym1_49 IPopRd2_55 Tambourine Splash Cym. ChaChaCBell NewRkCrCym2 Vibraslap NewRkRdCym1 NewHiBongo NewLoBongo NewCongaSlp NewCongaOp NewLoConga NewTmblHi NewTmblLo Agogo Agogo NewShaker2 NewShaker1 ShrtWhistle LongWhistle NewQuide1 NewQuide2 NewClaves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Cana NewTmblHiFlm NewTmblLoFlm NewTmblPHS NewShekere1 NewShekere2 NHBngoMute NewLBngoMute CajonHi
PC: 5 [CC32: 4] V-R&B
HipHop BD1 Jazz Kick 1 Mex_Kik36 85Rm BsDrum1 85Rm BsDrum2 HipHop BD2 Techno BD1 JungleBD Set HipHop BD1 909 Comp BD 85St BsDrum1 NewJzKik NewRockKik Cymbal Roll NewRkCStk_2 82Rm Snare1 82Rm Snare2 85St Snare1 85St Snare2 NewJzSn2 NewJzSn1 NewR&BSn NewRockSn2_2 NewRockSn1_2 IPopSn38_2 IPopGstS39_2 IPopSn38_2 FingerSnaps2 909 HandClap 808clap Hand clap2 909 HandClap IPopPHat32 GospelHClp1 IPopSRll30_2 IPopKik35 IPopKik36 IPopCStk37_2 NewR&BSn NewR&BSnGst IPopSn40_2 IPopTomLFl41 IPopHat1_42 IPopTomL43 IPopHat2_44 IPopTomMFl45 IPopHat3_46 IPopTomM47 IPopTomHFl48 IPopCym1_49 IPopTomH50 IPopRd1_51 IPopCyml2_52 IPopRd2_55 Tambourine Splash Cym. ChaChaCBell NewRkCrCym2 Vibraslap NewRkRdCym1 NewHiBongo NewLoBongo NewCongaSlp NewCongaOp NewLoConga NewTmblHi NewTmblLo Agogo Agogo NewShaker2 NewShaker1 ShrtWhistle LongWhistle NewQuide1 NewQuide2 NewClaves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Cana NewTmblHiFlm NewTmblLoFlm NewTmblPHS NewShekere1 NewShekere2 NHBngoMute NewLBngoMute CajonHi
PC: 6 [CC32: 4] V-Fiesta
HipHop BD1 Jazz Kick 1 Mex_Kik36 85Rm BsDrum1 85Rm BsDrum2 HipHop BD2 Techno BD1 JungleBD Set HipHop BD1 909 Comp BD 85St BsDrum1 NewJzKik NewRockKik Cymbal Roll NewRkCStk_2 82Rm Snare1 82Rm Snare2 85St Snare1 85St Snare2 NewJzSn2 NewJzSn1 NewR&BSn NewRockSn2_2 NewRockSn1_2 IPopSn38_2 IPopGstS39_2 IPopSn38_2 FingerSnaps2 909 HandClap 808clap Hand clap2 909 HandClap Mex_PHat32 GospelHClp1 Mex_SnrRol34 Mex_Kik35 Mex_Kik36 IPopCStk37_2 Mex_Snr38 Mex_GstS39 Mex_Snr40 IPopTomLFl41 Mex_Hat1_42 IPopTomL43 Mex_Hat2_44 IPopTomMFl45 Mex_Hat3_46 IPopTomM47 IPopTomHFl48 IPopCym1_49 IPopTomH50 IPopRd1_51 IPopCyml2_52 IPopRd2_55 Tambourine Splash Cym. ChaChaCBell NewRkCrCym2 Vibraslap NewRkRdCym1 NewHiBongo NewLoBongo NewCongaSlp NewCongaOp NewLoConga NewTmblHi NewTmblLo Agogo Agogo NewShaker2 NewShaker1 ShrtWhistle LongWhistle NewQuide1 NewQuide2 NewClaves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Cana NewTmblHiFlm NewTmblLoFlm NewTmblPHS NewShekere1 NewShekere2 NHBngoMute NewLBngoMute CajonHi
PC: 9 [CC32: 4] ROOM
Std.1 Kick1 Std.1 Kick2 Std.2 Kick1 Std2 Kick2 Kick 1 Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 Room Kick 1 Room Kick 2 Power Kick1 Power Kick2 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 TR-808 Kick TR-909 Kick Dance Kick 2 Voice One Voice Two Voice Three 85St BsDrum1 85St BsDrum2 MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll Finger Snap High-Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell 85Rm BsDrum1 85Rm BsDrum2 Side Stick 82Rm Snare2 808clap 82Rm Snare1 Room Tom 5 Room Chh Room Tom 5 Pedal HiHat Room Tom 2 R8 Ohh2 Room Tom 2 Room Tom 2 Crash Cym.1 Room Tom 2 Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym. Cowbell Crash Cym.2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H.Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause 2
---
---
---
---
---
--­85St Snare2 85St Snare1
PC: 10 [CC32: 4] HIP HOP
Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 BD 1 CR78 BD 2 TR-606 BD1 TR-707 BD 808 Kick TR-808 Kick 808 BD TR-909 Kick Dance Kick 2 909 Comp BD TR-909 BD2 HipHop BD2 JungleBD Set Techno BD1 Bounce Voice One Voice Two Voice Three HipHop BD1 Std2 Kick2 MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High-Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell TR-909 BD2 909 Comp BD 808 Rimshot Rap Snare 909 HandClap House SD Brush Tom Room Chh Brush Tom Pedal HiHat Brush Tom R8 Ohh2 Brush Tom Brush Tom 909 Crash Brush Tom Ride Cymbal ReverseCymbl Ride Bell Shake Tamb Splash Cym. 808cowbe Crash Cym.2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H.Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa 808marac ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro CR78 Guiro 808clave Woodblock Woodblock Hoo Hoo MuteTriangl OpenTriangl 626 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Small Club Rap Snare Power Snare2 Noise Slap 85St Snare1 85St Snare2 82Rm Snare1 82Rm Snare2 Dance Snare1
PC: 11 [CC32: 4] JUNGLE
Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 BD 1 CR78 BD 2 TR-606 BD1 TR-707 BD 808 Kick TR-808 Kick 808 BD TR-909 Kick Dance Kick 2 909 Comp BD TR-909 BD2 HipHop BD2 JungleBD Set Techno BD1 Bounce Voice One Voice Two Voice Three TR-909 BD2 909 Comp BD MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High-Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell HipHop BD1 Std2 Kick2 Side Stick Dance Snare1 HC2 Claps 2 House SD 909 Tom 606 CH 909 Tom Jungle HH 909 Tom 606 HiHat Op 909 Tom 909 Tom Jngl Crash 909 Tom Ride Cymbal ReverseCymbl Ride Bell Shake Tamb Splash Cym. 808cowbe Crash Cym.2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H.Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa 808marac ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro CR78 Guiro 808clave Woodblock Woodblock Hoo Hoo MuteTriangl OpenTriangl 626 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Small Club Jngl BD Roll Jngl SD Roll 66sn260 Dance Snare1 909 SD 1 Elec Snare 2 Dance Snare1 Rap Snare
PC: 12 [CC32: 4] TECHNO
Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 BD 1 CR78 BD 2 TR-606 BD1 TR-707 BD 808 Kick TR-808 Kick 808 BD TR-909 Kick Dance Kick 2 909 Comp BD TR-909 BD2 HipHop BD2 JungleBD Set Techno BD1 Bounce Voice One Voice Two Voice Three HipHop BD2 TR-909 BD2 MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High-Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell Techno BD1 TR-909 BD2 808 Rimshot Dance Snare1 707 Claps 909 SD 1 606 Dist.Tom TR-707 HH-c 606 Dist.Tom CR-78 chh 606 Dist.Tom 909 OH 606 Dist.Tom 606 Dist.Tom 909 Crash 606 Dist.Tom Ride Cymbal ReverseCymbl Ride Bell Shake Tamb Splash Cym. 808cowbe 909 Crash Vibraslap Ride Cymbal CR78 HiBongo CR78 LoBongo 808 Conga 808 Conga 808 Conga High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa 808marac ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro CR78 Guiro 808clave Woodblock Woodblock Hoo Hoo MuteTriangl OpenTriangl 626 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause 2 Dance Snare1 Elec Snare 2 Dance Snare1 House SD Rap Snare House SD Dance Snare1 Rap Snare
Page 97
Backing Module BK-7m
C2 36
38
40
41
43
45
47
37
39
42
44
46
C3 48
50
52
53
55
57
59
49
51
54
56
58
C4 60
62
64
65
67
69
71
61
63
66
68
70
C5 72
74
76
77
79
81
83
73
75
78
80
82
C6 84
C7 96
86
88
89
91
93
95
85
87
90
92
94
C0 12
14
16
17
19
21
23
13
15
18
20
22
C–1 0
2
4
5
7
9
11
1
3
6
8
10
C1 24
26
28
29
31
33
35
25
27
30
32
34
PC: 13 [CC32: 4] ROOM L/R
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
--­Voice One Voice Two Voice Three
---
--­MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll Finger Snap High-Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell 85Rm BsDrum1 85Rm BsDrum2 Side Stick 82Rm Snare2 808clap 82Rm Snare1 Room Tom 5 82RmClsHatB Room Tom 5 Pedal HiHat Room Tom 2 82RmOpenHatB Room Tom 2 Room Tom 2 Crash1c B Room Tom 2 Ride__c B ChinaCymbal Ridbl_c B Tambourine Splash Cym. Cowbell Crash Cym.2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H.Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause 2
---
---
---
---
---
--­85Rm BsDrum1 85Rm BsDrum2
PC: 14 [CC32: 4] HOUSE
Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 BD 1 CR78 BD 2 TR-606 BD1 TR-707 BD 808 Kick TR-808 Kick 808 BD TR-909 Kick Dance Kick 2 909 Comp BD TR-909 BD2 HipHop BD2 JungleBD Set Techno BD1 Bounce Voice One Voice Two Voice Three TR-909 BD2 Techno BD2 MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High-Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell HipHop BD2 TR-909 BD2 Side Stick House SD 909 HandClap Elec Snare 2 909 Tom TR-707 HH-c 909 Tom CR-78 chh 909 Tom 909 OH 909 Tom 909 Tom 909 Crash 909 Tom 909 Ride Cym ReverseCymbl Ride Bell Shake Tamb Splash Cym. 808cowbe 909 Crash Vibraslap Ride Cymbal CR78 HiBongo CR78 LoBongo 808 Conga 808 Conga 808 Conga High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa 808marac ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro CR78 Guiro 808clave Woodblock Woodblock Hoo Hoo MuteTriangl OpenTriangl 626 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause 2 66sn260 Dance Snare1 909 SD 1 Dance Snare1 Dance Snare1 Rap Snare House SD House SD
PC: 17 [CC32: 4] POWER
Std.1 Kick1 Std.1 Kick2 Std.2 Kick1 Std2 Kick2 Kick 1 Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 Room Kick 1 Room Kick 2 Power Kick1 Power Kick2 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 TR-808 Kick TR-909 Kick Dance Kick 2 Voice One Voice Two Voice Three
---
--­MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High-Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell Power Kick2 Power Kick1 Side Stick Dance Snare1 808clap Power Snare1 Rock Tom 4 Close HiHat2 Rock Tom 4 Pedal HiHat2 Rock Tom 4 Open HiHat2 Rock Tom 4 Rock Tom 1 Crash Cym.1 Rock Tom 1 Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym. Cowbell Crash Cym.2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H.Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause 2
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
PC: 20 [CC32: 4] V-Rock1
HipHop BD1 Jazz Kick 1 Mex_Kik36 85Rm BsDrum1 85Rm BsDrum2 HipHop BD2 Techno BD1 JungleBD Set HipHop BD1 909 Comp BD 85St BsDrum1 NewJzKik NewRockKik Cymbal Roll NewRkCStk_2 82Rm Snare1 82Rm Snare2 85St Snare1 85St Snare2 NewJzSn2 NewJzSn1 NewR&BSn IPopSn40_2 IPopSn38_2 IPopSn38_2 IPopGstS39_2 IPopSn40_2 FingerSnaps2 909 HandClap 808clap Hand clap2 909 HandClap NewRkHatPdl GospelHClp1 NewRkSnRll NewRockKik NewRockKik NewRkCStk_1 NewRockSn1_1 NewRkSnGst NewRockSn2_1 NewRkTomL2Fl NewRkHat1 NewRkTomL2 NewRkHat2 NewRkTomL1Fl NewRkHat3 NewRkTomL1 NewRkTomMFl NewRkCrCym1 NewRkTomM NewRkRdCym1 NewRkCrCym2 NewRkRdCym2 Tambourine NewRkCrCym3 ChaChaCBell NewRkCrCym4 Vibraslap IPopRd1_51 NewHiBongo NewLoBongo NewCongaSlp NewCongaOp NewLoConga NewTmblHi NewTmblLo Agogo Agogo NewShaker2 NewShaker1 ShrtWhistle LongWhistle NewQuide1 NewQuide2 NewClaves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Cana NewTmblHiFlm NewTmblLoFlm NewTmblPHS NewShekere1 NewShekere2 NHBngoMute NewLBngoMute CajonHi
PC: 19 [CC32: 4] V-Rock2
HipHop BD1 Jazz Kick 1 Mex_Kik36 85Rm BsDrum1 85Rm BsDrum2 HipHop BD2 Techno BD1 JungleBD Set HipHop BD1 909 Comp BD 85St BsDrum1 NewJzKik NewRockKik Cymbal Roll NewRkCStk_2 82Rm Snare1 82Rm Snare2 85St Snare1 85St Snare2 NewJzSn2 NewJzSn1 NewR&BSn IPopSn40_2 IPopSn38_2 IPopSn38_2 IPopGstS39_2 IPopSn38_2 FingerSnaps2 909 HandClap 808clap Hand clap2 909 HandClap NewRkHatPdl GospelHClp1 NewRkSnRll NewRockKik NewRockKik NewRkCStk_1 NewRockSn1_1 NewRkSnGst NewRockSn2_1 NewRkTomL1Fl NewRkHat1 NewRkTomL1 NewRkHat2 NewRkTomMFl NewRkHat3 NewRkTomM NewRkTomHiFl NewRkCrCym1 NewRkTomHi NewRkRdCym1 NewRkCrCym2 NewRkRdCym2 Tambourine NewRkCrCym3 ChaChaCBell NewRkCrCym4 Vibraslap IPopRd1_51 NewHiBongo NewLoBongo NewCongaSlp NewCongaOp NewLoConga NewTmblHi NewTmblLo Agogo Agogo NewShaker2 NewShaker1 ShrtWhistle LongWhistle NewQuide1 NewQuide2 NewClaves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Cana NewTmblHiFlm NewTmblLoFlm NewTmblPHS NewShekere1 NewShekere2 NHBngoMute NewLBngoMute CajonHi
PC: 25 [CC32: 4] ELECTRONIC
Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 BD 1 CR78 BD 2 TR-606 BD1 TR-707 BD 808 Kick TR-808 Kick 808 BD TR-909 Kick Dance Kick 2 909 Comp BD TR-909 BD2 HipHop BD2 JungleBD Set Techno BD1 Bounce Voice One Voice Two Voice Three
---
--­MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll Finger Snap High-Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 Side Stick Elec. Snare 808clap Elec Snare 2 Synth Drum 2 Jazz Clsd.HH Synth Drum 2 Pedal HiHat Synth Drum 2 Jazz Open HH Synth Drum 2 Synth Drum 2 Crash Cym.1 Synth Drum 2 Ride Cymbal ReverseCymbl Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym. Cowbell Crash Cym.2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H.Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Small Club
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
PC: 26 [CC32: 4] TR-808
Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 BD 1 CR78 BD 2 TR-606 BD1 TR-707 BD 808 Kick TR-808 Kick 808 BD TR-909 Kick Dance Kick 2 909 Comp BD TR-909 BD2 HipHop BD2 JungleBD Set Techno BD1 Bounce Voice One Voice Two Voice Three
---
--­MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High-Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell 808 BD TR-808 Kick 808 Rimshot 808 Snare 1 808clap TR-808 SD2 808 Tom 2 TR-808 CHH 808 Tom 2 808__chh 808 Tom 2 TR-808 OHH 808 Tom 2 808 Tom 2 808 Crash 808 Tom 2 606 Ride Cym ChinaCymbal Ride Bell CR78 Tmb Splash Cym. 808cowbe 909 Crash Vibraslap RideCym Edge CR78 HiBongo CR78 LoBongo 808 Conga 808 Conga 808 Conga High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa 808marac ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro CR78 Guiro 808clave Woodblock Woodblock Hoo Hoo MuteTriangl OpenTriangl 626 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Small Club
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
PC: 27 [CC32: 4] DANCE
Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 BD 1 CR78 BD 2 TR-606 BD1 TR-707 BD 808 Kick TR-808 Kick 808 BD TR-909 Kick Dance Kick 2 909 Comp BD TR-909 BD2 HipHop BD2 JungleBD Set Techno BD1 Bounce Voice One Voice Two Voice Three HipHop BD2 TR-909 BD2 MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll Finger Snap High-Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell TR-909 BD2 Techno BD2 Side Stick Dance Snare1 909 HandClap Power Snare1 Synth Drum 2 CR-78 chh Synth Drum 2 808__chh Synth Drum 2 CR-78 ohh Synth Drum 2 Synth Drum 2 808 Crash Synth Drum 2 606 Ride Cym ReverseCymbl Ride Bell Shake Tamb Splash Cym. 808cowbe Crash Cym.2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H.Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Hoo Hoo MuteTriangl OpenTriangl 626 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Small Club 66sn260 909 SD 1 Elec Snare 2 House SD Rap Snare House SD Dance Snare1 Rap Snare
PC: 28 [CC32: 4] CR-78
Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 BD 1 CR78 BD 2 TR-606 BD1 TR-707 BD 808 Kick TR-808 Kick 808 BD TR-909 Kick Dance Kick 2 909 Comp BD TR-909 BD2 HipHop BD2 JungleBD Set Techno BD1 Bounce Voice One Voice Two Voice Three
---
--­MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High-Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell CR78 BD 2 CR78 BD 1 CR78 Rim CR78 SD 1 707 Claps CR78 SD 2 78 TOM CR-78 chh 78 TOM 606 CH 78 TOM CR-78 ohh 78 TOM 78 TOM 808 Crash 78 TOM 606 Ride Cym ChinaCymbal Ride Bell CR78 Tmb Splash Cym. CR78 Cow 909 Crash Vibraslap RideCym Edge CR78 HiBongo CR78 LoBongo 808 Conga 808 Conga 808 Conga High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa CR78 Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro CR78 Guiro CR78 Clv Woodblock Woodblock Hoo Hoo CR78 M.Beat CR78 M.Beat 626 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Small Club
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
PC: 29 [CC32: 4] TR-606
Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 BD 1 CR78 BD 2 TR-606 BD1 TR-707 BD 808 Kick TR-808 Kick 808 BD TR-909 Kick Dance Kick 2 909 Comp BD TR-909 BD2 HipHop BD2 JungleBD Set Techno BD1 Bounce Voice One Voice Two Voice Three
---
--­MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High-Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell CR78 BD 2 TR-606 BD1 CR78 Rim 66sn160 707 Claps 66sn260 606 Tom 606 CH 606 Tom 606 CH 606 Tom 606 HiHat Op 606 Tom 606 Tom 808 Crash 606 Tom 606 Ride Cym ChinaCymbal Ride Bell CR78 Tmb Splash Cym. CR78 Cow 909 Crash Vibraslap RideCym Edge CR78 HiBongo CR78 LoBongo 808 Conga 808 Conga 808 Conga High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa CR78 Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro CR78 Guiro CR78 Clv Woodblock Woodblock Hoo Hoo CR78 M.Beat CR78 M.Beat 626 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Small Club
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
r
Drum Sets
97
Page 98
Backing Module BK-7m
Drum Sets
(C7) (96)
C8 108
C9G9120
98
100
101
103
105
107
110
112
113
115
117
119
122
124
125
127
97
99
102
104
106
109
111
114
116
118
121
123
126
PC: 1 [CC32: 4] STANDARD 1
82Rm Snare1 Std.1 Snare1 Std.1 Snare2 Std.2 Snare1 Std.2 Snare2 Tight Snare Standard SN1 LD Snare M LD Snare C Jazz Snare 1 Jazz Snare 2 Room Snare 1 Room Snare 2 Dance Snare1 Power Snare1 Rev.Snare Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec. Snare Elec Snare 3 TR-707 SD 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 Rap Snare JungleSD1 House SD House Snare House SD
PC: 2 [CC32: 4] STANDARD 2
--­Std.1 Snare1 Std.1 Snare2 Std.2 Snare1 Std.2 Snare2 Tight Snare Standard SN1 LD Snare M LD Snare C Jazz Snare 1 Jazz Snare 2 Room Snare 1 Room Snare 2 Dance Snare1 Power Snare1 Rev.Snare Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec. Snare Elec Snare 3 TR-707 SD 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 Rap Snare JungleSD1 House SD House Snare House SD
PC: 3 [CC32: 4] STANDARD L/R
85St BsDrum2 Crash Cym.1 85St Snare2 Ride Cymbal 85St Snare1 Real Tom 6 Close HiHat2 Real Tom 4 Ride Bell Real Tom 1 Open HiHat2 82StBsDrum1P 82StBsDrum2P 82JzCrsCym1P 82StSnare2P Ride__c P 82St Snare1P Real6_t P 82St ClsHatP Real4_t P Ridbl_c P Real1_t P 82StOpenHatP
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
PC: 7 [CC32: 4] V-Pop1
CajonHi CajonHiFlm CajonLo CajonLoFlm FlmncoHClp1 FlmncoHClp1 BongoCowBell AfHey MamboCowBell MexFVox2 AfFoots MexFVox1 MexMVox1 YodelFVox1 MexMVox2 YodelMVox1 MexMVox3 FlmncoFVox1 YodelFVox2 FlmncoFVox2 NewWhistle1 FlmncoFVox3 NewWhistle2 FlmncoMVox1 FlmncoMVox2 BrazilVox1 FlmncoMVox3 BrazilVox2 BrazilVox3 AfAahhh p33137v p33168v
PC: 5 [CC32: 4] V-R&B
CajonHi CajonHiFlm CajonLo CajonLoFlm FlmncoHClp1 FlmncoHClp1 BongoCowBell AfHey MamboCowBell MexFVox2 AfFoots MexFVox1 MexMVox1 YodelFVox1 MexMVox2 YodelMVox1 MexMVox3 FlmncoFVox1 YodelFVox2 FlmncoFVox2 NewWhistle1 FlmncoFVox3 NewWhistle2 FlmncoMVox1 FlmncoMVox2 BrazilVox1 FlmncoMVox3 BrazilVox2 BrazilVox3 AfAahhh p33137v p33168v
PC: 6 [CC32: 4] V-Fiesta
CajonHi CajonHiFlm CajonLo CajonLoFlm FlmncoHClp1 FlmncoHClp1 BongoCowBell AfHey MamboCowBell MexFVox2 AfFoots MexFVox1 MexMVox1 YodelFVox1 MexMVox2 YodelMVox1 MexMVox3 FlmncoFVox1 YodelFVox2 FlmncoFVox2 NewWhistle1 FlmncoFVox3 NewWhistle2 FlmncoMVox1 FlmncoMVox2 BrazilVox1 FlmncoMVox3 BrazilVox2 BrazilVox3 AfAahhh p33137v p33168v
PC: 9 [CC32: 4] ROOM
85St Snare1 Std.1 Snare1 Std.1 Snare2 Std.2 Snare1 Std.2 Snare2 Tight Snare Standard SN1 LD Snare M LD Snare C Jazz Snare 1 Jazz Snare 2 Room Snare 1 Room Snare 2 Dance Snare1 Power Snare1 Rev.Snare Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec. Snare Elec Snare 3 TR-707 SD 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 Rap Snare JungleSD1 House SD House Snare House SD
PC: 10 [CC32: 4] HIP HOP
Dance Snare1 Techno Hit Philly Hit Shock Wave Lo Fi Rave Bam Hit Bim Hit TapeRewind Phono Noise Dance Snare1 Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec. Snare Elec Snare 3 66sn260 TR-707 SD 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 TR-808 SD2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 909 SD 1 TR-909 SD2 Rap Snare JungleSD1 House SD House Snare House SD Voice Tah Noise Slap
PC: 11 [CC32: 4] JUNGLE
Rap Snare Techno Hit Philly Hit Shock Wave Lo Fi Rave Bam Hit Bim Hit TapeRewind Phono Noise Dance Snare1 Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec. Snare Elec Snare 3 66sn260 TR-707 SD 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 TR-808 SD2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 909 SD 1 TR-909 SD2 Rap Snare JungleSD1 House SD House Snare House SD Voice Tah Noise Slap
PC: 12 [CC32: 4] TECHNO
Rap Snare Techno Hit Philly Hit Shock Wave Lo Fi Rave Bam Hit Bim Hit TapeRewind Phono Noise Dance Snare1 Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec. Snare Elec Snare 3 66sn260 TR-707 SD 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 TR-808 SD2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 909 SD 1 TR-909 SD2 Rap Snare JungleSD1 House SD House Snare House SD Voice Tah Noise Slap
(C7) (96)
C8 108
C9G9120
98
100
101
103
105
107
110
112
113
115
117
119
122
124
125
127
97
99
102
104
106
109
111
114
116
118
121
123
126
PC: 13 [CC32: 4] ROOM L/R
85Rm BsDrum2 Crash Cym.1 82Rm Snare2 Ride Cymbal 82Rm Snare1 Room Tom 5 Room Chh Room Tom 2 Ride Bell Room Tom 2 R8 Ohh2 82RmBsDrum1P 82RmBsDrum2P 82JzCrsCym1P 82RmSnare2 P Ride__c P 82RmSnare1P Room Tom 5 P 82Rm ClsHatP Room Tom 2 P Ridbl_c P Room Tom 2 P 82RmOpenHatP
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
PC: 14 [CC32: 4] HOUSE
House SD Techno Hit Philly Hit Shock Wave Lo Fi Rave Bam Hit Bim Hit TapeRewind Phono Noise Dance Snare1 Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec. Snare Elec Snare 3 66sn260 TR-707 SD 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 TR-808 SD2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 909 SD 1 TR-909 SD2 Rap Snare JungleSD1 House SD House Snare House SD Voice Tah Noise Slap
PC: 17 [CC32: 4] POWER
--­Std.1 Snare1 Std.1 Snare2 Std.2 Snare1 Std.2 Snare2 Tight Snare Standard SN1 LD Snare M LD Snare C Jazz Snare 1 Jazz Snare 2 Room Snare 1 Room Snare 2 Dance Snare1 Power Snare1 Rev.Snare Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec. Snare Elec Snare 3 TR-707 SD 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 Rap Snare JungleSD1 House SD House Snare House SD
PC: 20 [CC32: 4] V-Rock1
CajonHi CajonHiFlm CajonLo CajonLoFlm FlmncoHClp1 FlmncoHClp1 BongoCowBell AfHey MamboCowBell MexFVox2 AfFoots MexFVox1 MexMVox1 YodelFVox1 MexMVox2 YodelMVox1 MexMVox3 FlmncoFVox1 YodelFVox2 FlmncoFVox2 NewWhistle1 FlmncoFVox3 NewWhistle2 FlmncoMVox1 FlmncoMVox2 BrazilVox1 FlmncoMVox3 BrazilVox2 BrazilVox3 AfAahhh p33137v p33168v
PC: 19 [CC32: 4] V-Rock2
CajonHi CajonHiFlm CajonLo CajonLoFlm FlmncoHClp1 FlmncoHClp1 BongoCowBell AfHey MamboCowBell MexFVox2 AfFoots MexFVox1 MexMVox1 YodelFVox1 MexMVox2 YodelMVox1 MexMVox3 FlmncoFVox1 YodelFVox2 FlmncoFVox2 NewWhistle1 FlmncoFVox3 NewWhistle2 FlmncoMVox1 FlmncoMVox2 BrazilVox1 FlmncoMVox3 BrazilVox2 BrazilVox3 AfAahhh p33137v p33168v
PC: 25 [CC32: 4] ELECTRONIC
--­Techno Hit Philly Hit Shock Wave Lo Fi Rave Bam Hit Bim Hit TapeRewind Phono Noise Dance Snare1 Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec. Snare Elec Snare 3 66sn260 TR-707 SD 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 TR-808 SD2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 909 SD 1 TR-909 SD2 Rap Snare JungleSD1 House SD House Snare House SD Voice Tah Noise Slap
PC: 26 [CC32: 4] TR-808
--­Techno Hit Philly Hit Shock Wave Lo Fi Rave Bam Hit Bim Hit TapeRewind Phono Noise Dance Snare1 Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec. Snare Elec Snare 3 66sn260 TR-707 SD 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 TR-808 SD2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 909 SD 1 TR-909 SD2 Rap Snare JungleSD1 House SD House Snare House SD Voice Tah Noise Slap
PC: 27 [CC32: 4] DANCE
Rap Snare Techno Hit Philly Hit Shock Wave Lo Fi Rave Bam Hit Bim Hit TapeRewind Phono Noise Dance Snare1 Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec. Snare Elec Snare 3 66sn260 TR-707 SD 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 TR-808 SD2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 909 SD 1 TR-909 SD2 Rap Snare JungleSD1 House SD House Snare House SD Voice Tah Noise Slap
PC: 28 [CC32: 4] CR-78
--­Techno Hit Philly Hit Shock Wave Lo Fi Rave Bam Hit Bim Hit TapeRewind Phono Noise Dance Snare1 Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec. Snare Elec Snare 3 66sn260 TR-707 SD 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 TR-808 SD2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 909 SD 1 TR-909 SD2 Rap Snare JungleSD1 House SD House Snare House SD Voice Tah Noise Slap
PC: 29 [CC32: 4] TR-606
--­Techno Hit Philly Hit Shock Wave Lo Fi Rave Bam Hit Bim Hit TapeRewind Phono Noise Dance Snare1 Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare2 Elec Snare 2 Elec. Snare Elec Snare 3 66sn260 TR-707 SD 808 Snare 1 808 Snare 2 TR-808 SD2 909 Snare 1 909 Snare 2 909 SD 1 TR-909 SD2 Rap Snare JungleSD1 House SD House Snare House SD Voice Tah Noise Slap
r
98
Page 99
Backing Module BK-7m
C2 36
38
40
41
43
45
47
37
39
42
44
46
C3 48
50
52
53
55
57
59
49
51
54
56
58
C4 60
62
64
65
67
69
71
61
63
66
68
70
C5 72
74
76
77
79
81
83
73
75
78
80
82
C6 84
C7 96
86
88
89
91
93
95
85
87
90
92
94
C0 12
14
16
17
19
21
23
13
15
18
20
22
C–1 0
2
4
5
7
9
11
1
3
6
8
10
C1 24
26
28
29
31
33
35
25
27
30
32
34
PC: 30 [CC32: 4] TR-707
Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 BD 1 CR78 BD 2 TR-606 BD1 TR-707 BD 808 Kick TR-808 Kick 808 BD TR-909 Kick Dance Kick 2 909 Comp BD TR-909 BD2 HipHop BD2 JungleBD Set Techno BD1 Bounce Voice One Voice Two Voice Three
---
--­MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High-Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell TR-707 BD 2 TR-707 BD TR-707 Rim TR-707 SD 707 Claps TR-707 SD 2 TR-707 Tom TR-707 HH-c TR-707 Tom TR-707 HH-c TR-707 Tom TR-707 OHH TR-707 Tom TR-707 Tom 909 Crash TR-707 Tom 909 Ride Cym ChinaCymbal Ride Bell 344Tambourn Splash Cym. 808cowbe Crash Cym.2 Vibraslap RideCym Edge Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H.Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa 808marac ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Hoo Hoo MuteTriangl OpenTriangl 626 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Small Club
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
PC: 31 [CC32: 4] TR-909
Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 CR78 BD 1 CR78 BD 2 TR-606 BD1 TR-707 BD 808 Kick TR-808 Kick 808 BD TR-909 Kick Dance Kick 2 909 Comp BD TR-909 BD2 HipHop BD2 JungleBD Set Techno BD1 Bounce Voice One Voice Two Voice Three
---
--­MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll FingerSnaps2 High-Q Slap Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell Techno BD2 TR-909 BD2 TR-909 Rim 909 SD 1 909 HandClap TR-909 SD2 909 Tom TR-707 HH-c 909 Tom TR-707 HH-c 909 Tom 909 OH 909 Tom 909 Tom 909 Crash 909 Tom 909 Ride Cym ChinaCymbal Ride Bell 344Tambourn Splash Cym. 808cowbe Crash Cym.2 Vibraslap RideCym Edge Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H.Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa 808marac ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro CR78 Guiro 808clave Woodblock Woodblock Hoo Hoo MuteTriangl OpenTriangl 626 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause 2
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
PC: 33 [CC32: 4] JAZZ
Std.1 Kick1 Std.1 Kick2 Std.2 Kick1 Std2 Kick2 Kick 1 Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 Room Kick 1 Room Kick 2 Power Kick1 Power Kick2 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 TR-808 Kick TR-909 Kick Dance Kick 2 Voice One Voice Two Voice Three 82Br BsDrum1 82Br BsDrum2 MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll Finger Snap High-Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell 82Jz BsDrum1 82Jz BsDrum2 Side Stick 82Jz Snare1 Hand clap2 82Jz Snare2 Real Tom 6 Jazz Clsd.HH Real Tom 6 Pedal HiHat Real Tom 4 Jazz Open HH Real Tom 4 Real Tom 1 Crash Cym.1 Real Tom 1 Ride Cym IN ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym. Cowbell Crash Cym.2 Vibraslap RideCym Edge Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H.Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
PC: 34 [CC32: 4] JAZZ L/R
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
--­Voice One Voice Two Voice Three
---
--­MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll Finger Snap High-Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell 82Jz BsDrum1 82Jz BsDrum2 Side Stick 82Jz Snare1 Hand clap2 82Jz Snare2 Real Tom 6 82JzClsHatB Real Tom 6 Pedal HiHat Real Tom 4 82JzOpenHatB Real Tom 4 Real Tom 1 Crash1c B Real Tom 1 Ride_i B ChinaCymbal Ridbl_c B Tambourine Splash Cym. Cowbell Crash Cym.2 Vibraslap RideCym Edge Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H.Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause
---
---
---
---
---
--­82Jz BsDrum1 82Jz BsDrum2
PC: 41 [CC32: 4] BRUSH
Std.1 Kick1 Std.1 Kick2 Std.2 Kick1 Std2 Kick2 Kick 1 Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 Room Kick 1 Room Kick 2 Power Kick1 Power Kick2 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 TR-808 Kick TR-909 Kick Dance Kick 2 Voice One Voice Two Voice Three
---
--­MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll Finger Snap High-Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell Jazz Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Side Stick Brush Swirl Brush Slap1 Brush Swirl Lite Tom 4 Brs Chh Lite Tom 4 Pedal HiHat Lite Tom 4 Brush Ohh Lite Tom 4 Lite Tom 4 Brush Crash Lite Tom 4 Ride Cym IN ChinaCymbal Brush RideBL Tambourine Splash Cym. Cowbell Crash Cym.2 Vibraslap RideCym Edge Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H.Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
PC: 42 [CC32: 4] BRUSH 2
Std.1 Kick1 Std.1 Kick2 Std.2 Kick1 Std2 Kick2 Kick 1 Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 Room Kick 1 Room Kick 2 Power Kick1 Power Kick2 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 TR-808 Kick TR-909 Kick Dance Kick 2 Voice One Voice Two Voice Three 82Jz BsDrum1 82Jz BsDrum2 MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll Finger Snap High-Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell 82Br BsDrum1 82Br BsDrum2 Side Stick 82Br Snare1 82Br Snare2 Brush Swirl Lite Tom 4 Brs Chh Lite Tom 4 Pedal HiHat Lite Tom 4 Brush Ohh Lite Tom 4 Lite Tom 4 Brush Crash Lite Tom 4 Ride Cym IN ChinaCymbal Brush RideBL Tambourine Splash Cym. Cowbell Crash Cym.2 Vibraslap RideCym Edge Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H.Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
PC: 43 [CC32: 4] BRUSH 2 L/R
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
--­Voice One Voice Two Voice Three
---
--­MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll Finger Snap High-Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell 82Br BsDrum1 82Br BsDrum2 Side Stick 82Br Snare1 82Br Snare2 Brush Swirl Lite Tom 4 82BrClsHatB Lite Tom 4 Pedal HiHat Lite Tom 4 82BrOpenHatB Lite Tom 4 Lite Tom 4 82BrCrsCym1B Lite Tom 4 82BrRdCymB ChinaCymbal 82BrRdBellB Tambourine Splash Cym. Cowbell Crash Cym.2 Vibraslap RideCym Edge Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H.Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause
---
---
---
---
---
--­82Br BsDrum1 82Br BsDrum2
PC: 44 [CC32: 4] V-JazzBrush
HipHop BD1 Jazz Kick 1 Mex_Kik36 85Rm BsDrum1 85Rm BsDrum2 HipHop BD2 Techno BD1 JungleBD Set HipHop BD1 909 Comp BD 85St BsDrum1 NewJzKik NewRockKik Cymbal Roll NewRkCStk_2 82Rm Snare1 82Rm Snare2 85St Snare1 85St Snare2 NewJzSn2 NewJzSn1 NewR&BSn IPopSn38_2 IPopSn40_2 IPopSn38_2 IPopGstS39_2 IPopSn38_2 FingerSnaps2 909 HandClap 808clap Hand clap2 909 HandClap NewJzHatPdl GospelHClp1 IPopSRll30_1 NewJzKik NewJzKik NewJzSW1 NewJzSn1 NewJzSW2 NewJzSn2 NewJzTomLoFl NewJzHat1 NewJzTomLo NewJzHat2 NewJzTomMFl NewJzHat3 NewRkTomMid NewJzTomHiFl NewJzCrCym1 NewJzTomHi NewJzRide1 NewJzCrCym2 NewJzRide2 Tambourine Splash Cym. ChaChaCBell NewJzCrCym1 Vibraslap NewRkRdCym1 NewHiBongo NewLoBongo NewCongaSlp NewCongaOp NewLoConga NewTmblHi NewTmblLo Agogo Agogo NewShaker2 NewShaker1 ShrtWhistle LongWhistle NewQuide1 NewQuide2 NewClaves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Cana NewTmblHiFlm NewTmblLoFlm NewTmblPHS NewShekere1 NewShekere2 NHBngoMute NewLBngoMute CajonHi
PC: 49 [CC32: 4] ORCHESTRA
Std.1 Kick1 Std.1 Kick2 Std.2 Kick1 Std2 Kick2 Kick 1 Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 Room Kick 1 Room Kick 2 Power Kick1 Power Kick2 Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 TR-808 Kick TR-909 Kick Dance Kick 2 Voice One Voice Two Voice Three
---
--­MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep Concert Snr Snare Roll Finger Snap Jazz Clsd.HH Pedal HiHat Jazz Open HH Ride Cymbal Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell Jazz Kick 1 Concert BD Side Stick Concert Snr Castanets Concert Snr Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Tambourine Splash Cym. Cowbell Con.Cymbal2 Vibraslap Concert Cym. Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H.Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
PC: 50 [CC32: 4] ETHNIC
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
--­Finger Snap Tambourine Castanets Crash Cym.1 Snare Roll Concert Snr Concert Cym Concert BD Jingle Bell Bell Tree Bar Chimes Wadaiko Wadaiko Rim Shimedaiko Atarigane Hyoushigi Ohkawa H kotsuzumi L Kotsuzumi Ban_Gu Big Gong Small Gong Bend Gong RAMA Cymbal RAMA Cymbal Gamelan Gong Udo_Short Udo_Long Udo_slap Bendir Req_Dum Req_tik Tabla_Te Tabla_Na Tabla_Tun Tabla_Ge Tabla Ge Hi Talking Drum Bend tlk_drm Caxixi DJembe Djembe_rim Low Timbale Timbl Paila High Timbale Cowbell Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H.Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga MtLow Conga Slap Conga Lo Opn Conga Slide Mut Pandiero Opn Pandiero Open Surdo Mute Surdo Tamborim Agogo Agogo Shaker Low Whistle Low Whistle Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Short Guiro Long Guiro Cabasa Up Cabasa Down
r
Drum Sets
99
Page 100
Backing Module BK-7m
Drum Sets
C–1 0
C0 12
C1 24
C2 36
C3 48
C4 60
C5 72
C6 84
C7 96
PC: 51 [CC32: 4] KICK & SNARE
---
---
1
---
2
3
---
4
---
---
5
---
6
---
7
8
---
9
---
10
---
11
---
---
---
13
---
14
15
---
16
---
---
17
---
18
---
19
20
---
21
---
22
---
23
---
--­CR78 BD 1
25
CR78 BD 2
26
27
TR-606 BD1
28
TR-707 BD 808 BD
29
909 Comp BD
30
TR-909 BD2
31
32
HipHop BD2
33
HipHop BD1
34
Jungle BD2
35
JungleBD Set Techno BD2 Techno BD1
37
Mix Kick
38
39
Standard KK1
40
Std.1 Kick1 Std.1 Kick2
41
Std.2 Kick1
42
Std2 Kick2
43
44
Kick 1
45
Kick 2
46
Soft Kick
47
Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 Concert BD
49
Room Kick 1
50
51
Room Kick 2
52
Power Kick1 Power Kick2
53
Elec Kick 2
54
Elec Kick 1
55
56
Elec. Kick
57
TR-808 Kick
58
TR-909 Kick
59
Dance Kick 2 Std.1 Snare1 Std.1 Snare2
61
Std.2 Snare1
62
63
Std.2 Snare2
64
Tight Snare Concert Snr
65
Jazz Snare 1
66
Jazz Snare 2
67
68
Room Snare 1
69
Room Snare 2
70
Dance Snare1
71
Power Snare1 Rev.Snare Power Snare2
73
Elec Snare 1
74
75
Dance Snare2
76
Elec Snare 2 House Snare
77
Elec. Snare
78
Elec Snare 3
79
80
808 Snare 1
81
808 Snare 2
82
909 Snare 1
83
909 Snare 2 Brush Swirl Brush Tap
85
Brush Slap1
86
87
Brush Slap2
88
Brush Slap Brush Swirl
89
Brush Swirl
90
Long Swirl
91
92
Standard SN1
93
LD Snare M
94
LD Snare C
95
Rap Snare HipHop SD2
PC: 52 [CC32: 4] KICK&SNARE 2
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
--­CR78 BD 1 CR78 BD 2 TR-606 BD1 TR-707 BD 808 BD 909 Comp BD TR-909 BD2 HipHop BD2 HipHop BD1 Jungle BD2 JungleBD Set Techno BD2 Techno BD1 Mix Kick Standard KK1 85St BsDrum1 85St BsDrum2 82Br BsDrum1 82Br BsDrum2 82Jz BsDrum1 82Jz BsDrum2 TR-909 BD2 909 Comp BD ConcertBD Mt Concert BD 85Rm BsDrum1 85Rm BsDrum2 HipHop BD1 Std2 Kick2 Jngl BD Roll TR-909 BD2 Techno BD2 Techno BD1 HipHop BD2 TR-909 BD2 85St Snare2 85St Snare1 Std.2 Snare1 Std.2 Snare2 Tight Snare Concert Snr 82Jz Snare1 82Jz Snare2 82Rm Snare2 82Rm Snare1 Rap Snare House SD Rev.Snare Power Snare2 Elec Snare 1 Dance Snare1 Rap Snare Dance Snare1 66sn260 909 SD 1 Elec Snare 2 Power Snare1 House SD Jngl SD Roll Brush Swirl Brush Tap 82Br Snare1 82Br Snare2 Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Swirl Long Swirl Standard SN1 LD Snare M LD Snare C Rap Snare HipHop SD2
PC: 53 [CC32: 4] ASIA
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
--­Gamelan Gong Gamelan Gong Gamelan Gong Gamelan Gong Gamelan Gong Gamelan Gong Gamelan Gong Gamelan Gong Gamelan Gong Gamelan Gong Gender Gender Gender Gender Gender Bonang Bonang Bonang Bonang Bonang RAMA Cymbal RAMA Cymbal Sagat R Sagat L-c Jaw Harp Wow Wadaiko Wadaiko Rim Taiko Shimedaiko Atarigane Hyoushigi Ohkawa H kotsuzumi L Kotsuzumi Yyoo Dude Buk_f Buk_r Gengari_p Gengari_m Gengari_f Gengari_m Gengari S Jang-Gu_c Jang-Gu_k Jang-Gu_r Jing_p Jing_f Jing_m Asian Gong 1 Big Gong Small Gong Pai Ban Ban_Gu tangu60 tanmt60 Bend Gong L Bend Gong Huyin Luo L hynlo60 Huyin Luo Mt Hu yin Luo H Hynlo mute naobo60 xaobo60 Dholak 1 Dholak 2
---
---
---
---
---
---
PC: 54 [CC32: 4] CYMBAL&CLAPS
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
--­rev.lvohh Rev. LVCHH 1 Rev. LVCHH 2 Jungle HH Close HiHat Jazz Clsd.HH Room Chh Close HiHat1 Close HiHat2 TR-707 HH-c 606 CH 808__chh TR-808 CHH CR-78 chh GS Pedal HH Pedal HiHat Pedal HiHat2 Half OpenHH1 Half OpenHH2 Open Hi Hat Jazz Open HH R8 Ohh2 Open HiHat2 909 OH TR-707 OHH 606 HiHat Op 808__ohh TR-808 OHH CR-78 ohh Crash Cym.1 Crash Cym.2 GS Crash Brush Crash Hard Crash 909 Crash 808 Crash Crash Mute 1 Crash Mute 2 ReverseCymbl Rev.Cymbal2 Reverse Cym. rev.tra_crsm Crash Cym.1 Splash Cym. Ride Bell Brush RideBL Ride Cymbal Ride Cymbal Brush Ride Ride Cym IN Ride Cym IN Ride Cym IN RideCym Edge RideCym Edge RideCym Edge 606 Ride Cym TR808 Ride ChinaCymbal Chaina Cym2 Hand Clap Hand clap2 808clap 909 HandClap HC2 Claps 2 707 Claps
PC: 55 [CC32: 4] GAMELAN 1
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
--­KendangWadon KendangWadon Bebarongan Pelegongan Kelontuk Kelontuk Mt Kelontuk Sid Gong Wadon Gong Lanang Ceng Ceng Kopyak Op Kopyak Mt Kajar Kempur Jegogan Jegogan33up Jegogan33dw Jegogan33dw Jegogan Jublag Jublag33up Jublag33dw Jublag33dw Jublag Penyacah33dw Penyacah Penyacah Penyacah33up Penyacah33dw Penyacah33dw Penyacah Pemade33up Pemade33dw Pemade33dw Pemade Pemade Pemade33up Pemade33dw Pemade33dw Pemade Pemade33up Reyong33dw Reyong33dw Reyoung Reyoung Reyong33up Reyong33dw Reyong33dw Reyoung Reyoung Reyong33up Reyong33dw Reyong33dw
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
PC: 56 [CC32: 4] GAMELAN 2
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
--­KendangWadon KendangWadon Bebarongan Pelegongan Kelontuk Kelontuk Mt Kelontuk Sid Gong Wadon Gong Lanang Ceng Ceng Kopyak Op Kopyak Mt Kajar Kempur Jegogan Jegogan40up Jegogan20dw Jegogan20up Jegogan40up Jublag Jublag40up Jublag20dw Jublag20up Jublag40up Penyacah20up Penyacah40up Penyacah Penyacah40up Penyacah20dw Penyacah20up Penyacah40up Pemade40up Pemade20dw Pemade20up Pemade20up Pemade Pemade40up Pemade20dw Pemade20up Pemade20up Pemade Reyong20dw Reyong20up Reyong20up Reyoung Reyong40up Reyong20dw Reyong20up Reyong40up Reyoung Reyong40up Reyong20dw Reyong20up
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
PC: 57 [CC32: 4] SFX
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
--­MC-500 Beep MC-500 Beep ytwn3.xtp ytwn2.xtp Guitar Slap Chord Stroke Chord Stroke Biwa 3 Phono Noise TapeRewind Scrtch Push2 Scrtch Pull2 Gt.CutNoise2 Gt.CutNoise2 Dist.CutNoiz Dist.CutNoiz Bass Slide Pick Scrape High-Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm.Click Mtrnm. Bell Gt.FretNoiz Gt.CutNoise Gt.CutNoise String Slap Fl.KeyClick Laughing Screaming Punch Heart Beat Footsteps Footsteps Applause Creaking Door Scratch Wind Chimes Car-Engine Car-Stop Car-Pass Car-Crash Siren Train Jetplane Helicopter Starship Gun Shot Machine Gun Lasergun Explosion Dog HorseGallop Bird Rain Thunder Wind Seashore Stream Bubble Kitty Bird 2 Growl Applause 2 Telephone 1 Telephone 2 Small Club Small Club 2 ApplauseWave Eruption Big Shot Perc. Bang
PC: 58 [CC32: 4] RHYTHM FX
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
--­Rev.Kick 1 Rev.ConBD Rev.PowerK1 Rev.Elec.K1 Rev.Snare 1 Rev.Snare 2 Rev.Std1SD1 Rev.TightSD Rev.DanceSD Rev.808SD Rev.Tom 1 Rev.Tom 2 Rev.Sticks Rev.Slap ReverseCymbl Rev.Cymbal2 Rev.Open HH Rev.RideCym. Rev.CR-78OHH Rev.Clsd.HH Rev.BendGong Rev.Belltree Rev.Guiro Rev.Bendir Rev.GunShot Rev.Scratch Rev.Lasergun Click Tekno Thip Pop Drop Wood Slap Dist.Kick Syn.Drops Rev.Hi-Q ShrtWhistle Ice Block Digi Tambrn. Alias Mod.Bell Tambourine Metalic Perc Velo FX Noiz St.NoiseClap Swish Noise Slap Voice 1 Voice Au Hoo Tape Stop 1 Tape Stop 2 Missile Space Birds FlyingMonstr
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
PC: 59 [CC32: 4] RHYTHM FX 2
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
--­rev.707bd rev.909bd2 rev.hphp_bd1 rev.jgl_bd2 rev.tech_bd2 rev.606sn2 rev.cr78sd1 rev.cr78sd2 rev.jgl_sd2 rev.tech_sd2 rev.707sd rev.606sn1 rev.909sd1 rev.hphp_sd2 rev.jgl_sd1 Rev House SD Rev. LVCHH 1 rev.606htcl rev.707chh rev.808chh rev.jgl_hh rev.344tmb2 rev.344tmb3 rev.808ohh rev.707ohh rev.lvohh rev.606cym Rev. HynLuo rev.707fx Voice One rev.one Voice Two rev.two Voice Three rev.three Voice Tah rev.tah Voice 1 Voice Au Voice Whey Frog Vpoce rev.yyooh Douby rev.douby Baert Baert Bounce rev.bounce Dist Knock ytwn3.xtp xxx Noise Attack SpaceWorms Emergency! Calculating SawLFOSaw
---
---
---
---
---
PC: 60 [CC32: 4] RHYTHM FX 3
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
--­R Bs Mute NZ R Bs StQuail R Bs Atk NZ R ClnGtCutUp R ClnGtCutDn R ClnGtrMtUp R ClnGtrMtDn R DstGtCutUp R DstGtCutDn R DstGtrSgdn R DstGtrMute R SlGtrSdNz1 R SlGtrSdNz2 R SlGtrSdNz3 R SlGtrSdNz4 R SlGtrStkSD R SlGtrStkU1 R SlGtrStkD1 R SlGtrStkU2 R SlGtrStkD2 R Tbone NZ R Tpet NZ R St BsDrum1 R St BsDrum2 R Rm BsDrum1 R Rm BsDrum2 R Jz BsDrum1 R Jz BsDrum2 R Br BsDrum1 R Br BsDrum2 rev.hphp_bd1 rev.707bd rev.jgl_bd2 rev.707bd Rev.Kick 1 rev.909bd2 rev.hphp_bd1 rev.909bd2 rev.tech_bd2 R St Snare2 R St Snare1 R Rm Snare2 R Rm Snare1 R Jz Snare1 R Jz Snare2 R Br Snare1 R Br Snare2 R Br Snare1 Rev.Snare 1 R St Snare2 rev.606sn2 R Rm Snare2 Rev House SD rev.hphp_sd2 rev.606sn1 rev.hphp_sd2 R Jz Snare2 Rev.Snare 1 Rev.808SD Rev House SD Rev.Hi-Q Rev.DanceSD Rev.Tom 1 Rev.Tom 1 Rev.Tom 1 R 606 Tom R Jngl Crash Rev. LVCHH 1 Rev. LVCHH 1 Rev.CR-78OHH Rev. LVCHH 1 R Stab! 1 R Bounce R St Snare2 R Br Snare1 rev.hphp_sd2 Shaker Rev.Slap R Clap Hit R Boeeeen
r
100
Loading...